1 /* vi:set ts=8 sts=4 sw=4: 2 * 3 * VIM - Vi IMproved by Bram Moolenaar 4 * 5 * Do ":help uganda" in Vim to read copying and usage conditions. 6 * Do ":help credits" in Vim to see a list of people who contributed. 7 * See README.txt for an overview of the Vim source code. 8 */ 9 10 /* 11 * misc1.c: functions that didn't seem to fit elsewhere 12 */ 13 14 #include "vim.h" 15 #include "version.h" 16 17 #ifdef HAVE_FCNTL_H 18 # include <fcntl.h> /* for chdir() */ 19 #endif 20 21 static char_u *vim_version_dir __ARGS((char_u *vimdir)); 22 static char_u *remove_tail __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *name)); 23 #if defined(USE_EXE_NAME) && defined(MACOS_X) 24 static char_u *remove_tail_with_ext __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *ext)); 25 #endif 26 static int copy_indent __ARGS((int size, char_u *src)); 27 28 /* 29 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in the current line. 30 */ 31 int 32 get_indent() 33 { 34 return get_indent_str(ml_get_curline(), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 35 } 36 37 /* 38 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum". 39 */ 40 int 41 get_indent_lnum(lnum) 42 linenr_T lnum; 43 { 44 return get_indent_str(ml_get(lnum), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 45 } 46 47 #if defined(FEAT_FOLDING) || defined(PROTO) 48 /* 49 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum" of buffer 50 * "buf". 51 */ 52 int 53 get_indent_buf(buf, lnum) 54 buf_T *buf; 55 linenr_T lnum; 56 { 57 return get_indent_str(ml_get_buf(buf, lnum, FALSE), (int)buf->b_p_ts); 58 } 59 #endif 60 61 /* 62 * count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "ptr", with 63 * 'tabstop' at "ts" 64 */ 65 int 66 get_indent_str(ptr, ts) 67 char_u *ptr; 68 int ts; 69 { 70 int count = 0; 71 72 for ( ; *ptr; ++ptr) 73 { 74 if (*ptr == TAB) /* count a tab for what it is worth */ 75 count += ts - (count % ts); 76 else if (*ptr == ' ') 77 ++count; /* count a space for one */ 78 else 79 break; 80 } 81 return count; 82 } 83 84 /* 85 * Set the indent of the current line. 86 * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line. 87 * Caller must take care of undo. 88 * "flags": 89 * SIN_CHANGED: call changed_bytes() if the line was changed. 90 * SIN_INSERT: insert the indent in front of the line. 91 * SIN_UNDO: save line for undo before changing it. 92 * Returns TRUE if the line was changed. 93 */ 94 int 95 set_indent(size, flags) 96 int size; 97 int flags; 98 { 99 char_u *p; 100 char_u *newline; 101 char_u *oldline; 102 char_u *s; 103 int todo; 104 int ind_len; 105 int line_len; 106 int doit = FALSE; 107 int ind_done; 108 int tab_pad; 109 int retval = FALSE; 110 111 /* 112 * First check if there is anything to do and compute the number of 113 * characters needed for the indent. 114 */ 115 todo = size; 116 ind_len = 0; 117 p = oldline = ml_get_curline(); 118 119 /* Calculate the buffer size for the new indent, and check to see if it 120 * isn't already set */ 121 122 /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */ 123 if (!curbuf->b_p_et) 124 { 125 /* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of 126 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */ 127 if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi) 128 { 129 ind_done = 0; 130 131 /* count as many characters as we can use */ 132 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p)) 133 { 134 if (*p == TAB) 135 { 136 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts 137 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 138 /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */ 139 if (todo < tab_pad) 140 break; 141 todo -= tab_pad; 142 ++ind_len; 143 ind_done += tab_pad; 144 } 145 else 146 { 147 --todo; 148 ++ind_len; 149 ++ind_done; 150 } 151 ++p; 152 } 153 154 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */ 155 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 156 if (todo >= tab_pad) 157 { 158 doit = TRUE; 159 todo -= tab_pad; 160 ++ind_len; 161 /* ind_done += tab_pad; */ 162 } 163 } 164 165 /* count tabs required for indent */ 166 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts) 167 { 168 if (*p != TAB) 169 doit = TRUE; 170 else 171 ++p; 172 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; 173 ++ind_len; 174 /* ind_done += (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; */ 175 } 176 } 177 /* count spaces required for indent */ 178 while (todo > 0) 179 { 180 if (*p != ' ') 181 doit = TRUE; 182 else 183 ++p; 184 --todo; 185 ++ind_len; 186 /* ++ind_done; */ 187 } 188 189 /* Return if the indent is OK already. */ 190 if (!doit && !vim_iswhite(*p) && !(flags & SIN_INSERT)) 191 return FALSE; 192 193 /* Allocate memory for the new line. */ 194 if (flags & SIN_INSERT) 195 p = oldline; 196 else 197 p = skipwhite(p); 198 line_len = (int)STRLEN(p) + 1; 199 newline = alloc(ind_len + line_len); 200 if (newline == NULL) 201 return FALSE; 202 203 /* Put the characters in the new line. */ 204 s = newline; 205 todo = size; 206 /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */ 207 if (!curbuf->b_p_et) 208 { 209 /* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of 210 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */ 211 if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi) 212 { 213 p = oldline; 214 ind_done = 0; 215 216 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p)) 217 { 218 if (*p == TAB) 219 { 220 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts 221 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 222 /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */ 223 if (todo < tab_pad) 224 break; 225 todo -= tab_pad; 226 ind_done += tab_pad; 227 } 228 else 229 { 230 --todo; 231 ++ind_done; 232 } 233 *s++ = *p++; 234 } 235 236 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */ 237 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 238 if (todo >= tab_pad) 239 { 240 *s++ = TAB; 241 todo -= tab_pad; 242 } 243 244 p = skipwhite(p); 245 } 246 247 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts) 248 { 249 *s++ = TAB; 250 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; 251 } 252 } 253 while (todo > 0) 254 { 255 *s++ = ' '; 256 --todo; 257 } 258 mch_memmove(s, p, (size_t)line_len); 259 260 /* Replace the line (unless undo fails). */ 261 if (!(flags & SIN_UNDO) || u_savesub(curwin->w_cursor.lnum) == OK) 262 { 263 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, newline, FALSE); 264 if (flags & SIN_CHANGED) 265 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0); 266 /* Correct saved cursor position if it's after the indent. */ 267 if (saved_cursor.lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum 268 && saved_cursor.col >= (colnr_T)(p - oldline)) 269 saved_cursor.col += ind_len - (p - oldline); 270 retval = TRUE; 271 } 272 else 273 vim_free(newline); 274 275 curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len; 276 return retval; 277 } 278 279 /* 280 * Copy the indent from ptr to the current line (and fill to size) 281 * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line. 282 * Returns TRUE if the line was changed. 283 */ 284 static int 285 copy_indent(size, src) 286 int size; 287 char_u *src; 288 { 289 char_u *p = NULL; 290 char_u *line = NULL; 291 char_u *s; 292 int todo; 293 int ind_len; 294 int line_len = 0; 295 int tab_pad; 296 int ind_done; 297 int round; 298 299 /* Round 1: compute the number of characters needed for the indent 300 * Round 2: copy the characters. */ 301 for (round = 1; round <= 2; ++round) 302 { 303 todo = size; 304 ind_len = 0; 305 ind_done = 0; 306 s = src; 307 308 /* Count/copy the usable portion of the source line */ 309 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*s)) 310 { 311 if (*s == TAB) 312 { 313 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts 314 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 315 /* Stop if this tab will overshoot the target */ 316 if (todo < tab_pad) 317 break; 318 todo -= tab_pad; 319 ind_done += tab_pad; 320 } 321 else 322 { 323 --todo; 324 ++ind_done; 325 } 326 ++ind_len; 327 if (round == 2) 328 *p++ = *s; 329 ++s; 330 } 331 332 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */ 333 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 334 if (todo >= tab_pad) 335 { 336 todo -= tab_pad; 337 ++ind_len; 338 if (round == 2) 339 *p++ = TAB; 340 } 341 342 /* Add tabs required for indent */ 343 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts) 344 { 345 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; 346 ++ind_len; 347 if (round == 2) 348 *p++ = TAB; 349 } 350 351 /* Count/add spaces required for indent */ 352 while (todo > 0) 353 { 354 --todo; 355 ++ind_len; 356 if (round == 2) 357 *p++ = ' '; 358 } 359 360 if (round == 1) 361 { 362 /* Allocate memory for the result: the copied indent, new indent 363 * and the rest of the line. */ 364 line_len = (int)STRLEN(ml_get_curline()) + 1; 365 line = alloc(ind_len + line_len); 366 if (line == NULL) 367 return FALSE; 368 p = line; 369 } 370 } 371 372 /* Append the original line */ 373 mch_memmove(p, ml_get_curline(), (size_t)line_len); 374 375 /* Replace the line */ 376 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, line, FALSE); 377 378 /* Put the cursor after the indent. */ 379 curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len; 380 return TRUE; 381 } 382 383 /* 384 * Return the indent of the current line after a number. Return -1 if no 385 * number was found. Used for 'n' in 'formatoptions': numbered list. 386 * Since a pattern is used it can actually handle more than numbers. 387 */ 388 int 389 get_number_indent(lnum) 390 linenr_T lnum; 391 { 392 colnr_T col; 393 pos_T pos; 394 regmmatch_T regmatch; 395 396 if (lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count) 397 return -1; 398 pos.lnum = 0; 399 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(curbuf->b_p_flp, RE_MAGIC); 400 if (regmatch.regprog != NULL) 401 { 402 regmatch.rmm_ic = FALSE; 403 regmatch.rmm_maxcol = 0; 404 if (vim_regexec_multi(®match, curwin, curbuf, lnum, (colnr_T)0)) 405 { 406 pos.lnum = regmatch.endpos[0].lnum + lnum; 407 pos.col = regmatch.endpos[0].col; 408 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 409 pos.coladd = 0; 410 #endif 411 } 412 vim_free(regmatch.regprog); 413 } 414 415 if (pos.lnum == 0 || *ml_get_pos(&pos) == NUL) 416 return -1; 417 getvcol(curwin, &pos, &col, NULL, NULL); 418 return (int)col; 419 } 420 421 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) 422 423 static int cin_is_cinword __ARGS((char_u *line)); 424 425 /* 426 * Return TRUE if the string "line" starts with a word from 'cinwords'. 427 */ 428 static int 429 cin_is_cinword(line) 430 char_u *line; 431 { 432 char_u *cinw; 433 char_u *cinw_buf; 434 int cinw_len; 435 int retval = FALSE; 436 int len; 437 438 cinw_len = (int)STRLEN(curbuf->b_p_cinw) + 1; 439 cinw_buf = alloc((unsigned)cinw_len); 440 if (cinw_buf != NULL) 441 { 442 line = skipwhite(line); 443 for (cinw = curbuf->b_p_cinw; *cinw; ) 444 { 445 len = copy_option_part(&cinw, cinw_buf, cinw_len, ","); 446 if (STRNCMP(line, cinw_buf, len) == 0 447 && (!vim_iswordc(line[len]) || !vim_iswordc(line[len - 1]))) 448 { 449 retval = TRUE; 450 break; 451 } 452 } 453 vim_free(cinw_buf); 454 } 455 return retval; 456 } 457 #endif 458 459 /* 460 * open_line: Add a new line below or above the current line. 461 * 462 * For VREPLACE mode, we only add a new line when we get to the end of the 463 * file, otherwise we just start replacing the next line. 464 * 465 * Caller must take care of undo. Since VREPLACE may affect any number of 466 * lines however, it may call u_save_cursor() again when starting to change a 467 * new line. 468 * "flags": OPENLINE_DELSPACES delete spaces after cursor 469 * OPENLINE_DO_COM format comments 470 * OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL keep trailing spaces 471 * OPENLINE_MARKFIX adjust mark positions after the line break 472 * 473 * Return TRUE for success, FALSE for failure 474 */ 475 int 476 open_line(dir, flags, old_indent) 477 int dir; /* FORWARD or BACKWARD */ 478 int flags; 479 int old_indent; /* indent for after ^^D in Insert mode */ 480 { 481 char_u *saved_line; /* copy of the original line */ 482 char_u *next_line = NULL; /* copy of the next line */ 483 char_u *p_extra = NULL; /* what goes to next line */ 484 int less_cols = 0; /* less columns for mark in new line */ 485 int less_cols_off = 0; /* columns to skip for mark adjust */ 486 pos_T old_cursor; /* old cursor position */ 487 int newcol = 0; /* new cursor column */ 488 int newindent = 0; /* auto-indent of the new line */ 489 int n; 490 int trunc_line = FALSE; /* truncate current line afterwards */ 491 int retval = FALSE; /* return value, default is FAIL */ 492 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 493 int extra_len = 0; /* length of p_extra string */ 494 int lead_len; /* length of comment leader */ 495 char_u *lead_flags; /* position in 'comments' for comment leader */ 496 char_u *leader = NULL; /* copy of comment leader */ 497 #endif 498 char_u *allocated = NULL; /* allocated memory */ 499 #if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_LISP) \ 500 || defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) 501 char_u *p; 502 #endif 503 int saved_char = NUL; /* init for GCC */ 504 #if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) 505 pos_T *pos; 506 #endif 507 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 508 int do_si = (!p_paste && curbuf->b_p_si 509 # ifdef FEAT_CINDENT 510 && !curbuf->b_p_cin 511 # endif 512 ); 513 int no_si = FALSE; /* reset did_si afterwards */ 514 int first_char = NUL; /* init for GCC */ 515 #endif 516 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT)) 517 int vreplace_mode; 518 #endif 519 int did_append; /* appended a new line */ 520 int saved_pi = curbuf->b_p_pi; /* copy of preserveindent setting */ 521 522 /* 523 * make a copy of the current line so we can mess with it 524 */ 525 saved_line = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline()); 526 if (saved_line == NULL) /* out of memory! */ 527 return FALSE; 528 529 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE 530 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG) 531 { 532 /* 533 * With VREPLACE we make a copy of the next line, which we will be 534 * starting to replace. First make the new line empty and let vim play 535 * with the indenting and comment leader to its heart's content. Then 536 * we grab what it ended up putting on the new line, put back the 537 * original line, and call ins_char() to put each new character onto 538 * the line, replacing what was there before and pushing the right 539 * stuff onto the replace stack. -- webb. 540 */ 541 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum < orig_line_count) 542 next_line = vim_strsave(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1)); 543 else 544 next_line = vim_strsave((char_u *)""); 545 if (next_line == NULL) /* out of memory! */ 546 goto theend; 547 548 /* 549 * In VREPLACE mode, a NL replaces the rest of the line, and starts 550 * replacing the next line, so push all of the characters left on the 551 * line onto the replace stack. We'll push any other characters that 552 * might be replaced at the start of the next line (due to autoindent 553 * etc) a bit later. 554 */ 555 replace_push(NUL); /* Call twice because BS over NL expects it */ 556 replace_push(NUL); 557 p = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col; 558 while (*p != NUL) 559 replace_push(*p++); 560 saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL; 561 } 562 #endif 563 564 if ((State & INSERT) 565 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE 566 && !(State & VREPLACE_FLAG) 567 #endif 568 ) 569 { 570 p_extra = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col; 571 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 572 if (do_si) /* need first char after new line break */ 573 { 574 p = skipwhite(p_extra); 575 first_char = *p; 576 } 577 #endif 578 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 579 extra_len = (int)STRLEN(p_extra); 580 #endif 581 saved_char = *p_extra; 582 *p_extra = NUL; 583 } 584 585 u_clearline(); /* cannot do "U" command when adding lines */ 586 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 587 did_si = FALSE; 588 #endif 589 ai_col = 0; 590 591 /* 592 * If we just did an auto-indent, then we didn't type anything on 593 * the prior line, and it should be truncated. Do this even if 'ai' is not 594 * set because automatically inserting a comment leader also sets did_ai. 595 */ 596 if (dir == FORWARD && did_ai) 597 trunc_line = TRUE; 598 599 /* 600 * If 'autoindent' and/or 'smartindent' is set, try to figure out what 601 * indent to use for the new line. 602 */ 603 if (curbuf->b_p_ai 604 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 605 || do_si 606 #endif 607 ) 608 { 609 /* 610 * count white space on current line 611 */ 612 newindent = get_indent_str(saved_line, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 613 if (newindent == 0) 614 newindent = old_indent; /* for ^^D command in insert mode */ 615 616 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 617 /* 618 * Do smart indenting. 619 * In insert/replace mode (only when dir == FORWARD) 620 * we may move some text to the next line. If it starts with '{' 621 * don't add an indent. Fixes inserting a NL before '{' in line 622 * "if (condition) {" 623 */ 624 if (!trunc_line && do_si && *saved_line != NUL 625 && (p_extra == NULL || first_char != '{')) 626 { 627 char_u *ptr; 628 char_u last_char; 629 630 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor; 631 ptr = saved_line; 632 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 633 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM) 634 lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE); 635 else 636 lead_len = 0; 637 # endif 638 if (dir == FORWARD) 639 { 640 /* 641 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are 642 * recognised as comments. 643 */ 644 if ( 645 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 646 lead_len == 0 && 647 # endif 648 ptr[0] == '#') 649 { 650 while (ptr[0] == '#' && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1) 651 ptr = ml_get(--curwin->w_cursor.lnum); 652 newindent = get_indent(); 653 } 654 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 655 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM) 656 lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE); 657 else 658 lead_len = 0; 659 if (lead_len > 0) 660 { 661 /* 662 * This case gets the following right: 663 * \* 664 * * A comment (read '\' as '/'). 665 * *\ 666 * #define IN_THE_WAY 667 * This should line up here; 668 */ 669 p = skipwhite(ptr); 670 if (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '*') 671 p++; 672 if (p[0] == '*') 673 { 674 for (p++; *p; p++) 675 { 676 if (p[0] == '/' && p[-1] == '*') 677 { 678 /* 679 * End of C comment, indent should line up 680 * with the line containing the start of 681 * the comment 682 */ 683 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr); 684 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL) 685 { 686 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum; 687 newindent = get_indent(); 688 } 689 } 690 } 691 } 692 } 693 else /* Not a comment line */ 694 # endif 695 { 696 /* Find last non-blank in line */ 697 p = ptr + STRLEN(ptr) - 1; 698 while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p)) 699 --p; 700 last_char = *p; 701 702 /* 703 * find the character just before the '{' or ';' 704 */ 705 if (last_char == '{' || last_char == ';') 706 { 707 if (p > ptr) 708 --p; 709 while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p)) 710 --p; 711 } 712 /* 713 * Try to catch lines that are split over multiple 714 * lines. eg: 715 * if (condition && 716 * condition) { 717 * Should line up here! 718 * } 719 */ 720 if (*p == ')') 721 { 722 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr); 723 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) != NULL) 724 { 725 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum; 726 newindent = get_indent(); 727 ptr = ml_get_curline(); 728 } 729 } 730 /* 731 * If last character is '{' do indent, without 732 * checking for "if" and the like. 733 */ 734 if (last_char == '{') 735 { 736 did_si = TRUE; /* do indent */ 737 no_si = TRUE; /* don't delete it when '{' typed */ 738 } 739 /* 740 * Look for "if" and the like, use 'cinwords'. 741 * Don't do this if the previous line ended in ';' or 742 * '}'. 743 */ 744 else if (last_char != ';' && last_char != '}' 745 && cin_is_cinword(ptr)) 746 did_si = TRUE; 747 } 748 } 749 else /* dir == BACKWARD */ 750 { 751 /* 752 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are 753 * recognised as comments. 754 */ 755 if ( 756 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 757 lead_len == 0 && 758 # endif 759 ptr[0] == '#') 760 { 761 int was_backslashed = FALSE; 762 763 while ((ptr[0] == '#' || was_backslashed) && 764 curwin->w_cursor.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count) 765 { 766 if (*ptr && ptr[STRLEN(ptr) - 1] == '\\') 767 was_backslashed = TRUE; 768 else 769 was_backslashed = FALSE; 770 ptr = ml_get(++curwin->w_cursor.lnum); 771 } 772 if (was_backslashed) 773 newindent = 0; /* Got to end of file */ 774 else 775 newindent = get_indent(); 776 } 777 p = skipwhite(ptr); 778 if (*p == '}') /* if line starts with '}': do indent */ 779 did_si = TRUE; 780 else /* can delete indent when '{' typed */ 781 can_si_back = TRUE; 782 } 783 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor; 784 } 785 if (do_si) 786 can_si = TRUE; 787 #endif /* FEAT_SMARTINDENT */ 788 789 did_ai = TRUE; 790 } 791 792 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 793 /* 794 * Find out if the current line starts with a comment leader. 795 * This may then be inserted in front of the new line. 796 */ 797 end_comment_pending = NUL; 798 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM) 799 lead_len = get_leader_len(saved_line, &lead_flags, dir == BACKWARD); 800 else 801 lead_len = 0; 802 if (lead_len > 0) 803 { 804 char_u *lead_repl = NULL; /* replaces comment leader */ 805 int lead_repl_len = 0; /* length of *lead_repl */ 806 char_u lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* middle-comment string */ 807 char_u lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* end-comment string */ 808 char_u *comment_end = NULL; /* where lead_end has been found */ 809 int extra_space = FALSE; /* append extra space */ 810 int current_flag; 811 int require_blank = FALSE; /* requires blank after middle */ 812 char_u *p2; 813 814 /* 815 * If the comment leader has the start, middle or end flag, it may not 816 * be used or may be replaced with the middle leader. 817 */ 818 for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p) 819 { 820 if (*p == COM_BLANK) 821 { 822 require_blank = TRUE; 823 continue; 824 } 825 if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_MIDDLE) 826 { 827 current_flag = *p; 828 if (*p == COM_START) 829 { 830 /* 831 * Doing "O" on a start of comment does not insert leader. 832 */ 833 if (dir == BACKWARD) 834 { 835 lead_len = 0; 836 break; 837 } 838 839 /* find start of middle part */ 840 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ","); 841 require_blank = FALSE; 842 } 843 844 /* 845 * Isolate the strings of the middle and end leader. 846 */ 847 while (*p && p[-1] != ':') /* find end of middle flags */ 848 { 849 if (*p == COM_BLANK) 850 require_blank = TRUE; 851 ++p; 852 } 853 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ","); 854 855 while (*p && p[-1] != ':') /* find end of end flags */ 856 { 857 /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */ 858 if (*p == COM_AUTO_END) 859 end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */ 860 ++p; 861 } 862 n = copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ","); 863 864 if (end_comment_pending == -1) /* we can set it now */ 865 end_comment_pending = lead_end[n - 1]; 866 867 /* 868 * If the end of the comment is in the same line, don't use 869 * the comment leader. 870 */ 871 if (dir == FORWARD) 872 { 873 for (p = saved_line + lead_len; *p; ++p) 874 if (STRNCMP(p, lead_end, n) == 0) 875 { 876 comment_end = p; 877 lead_len = 0; 878 break; 879 } 880 } 881 882 /* 883 * Doing "o" on a start of comment inserts the middle leader. 884 */ 885 if (lead_len > 0) 886 { 887 if (current_flag == COM_START) 888 { 889 lead_repl = lead_middle; 890 lead_repl_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle); 891 } 892 893 /* 894 * If we have hit RETURN immediately after the start 895 * comment leader, then put a space after the middle 896 * comment leader on the next line. 897 */ 898 if (!vim_iswhite(saved_line[lead_len - 1]) 899 && ((p_extra != NULL 900 && (int)curwin->w_cursor.col == lead_len) 901 || (p_extra == NULL 902 && saved_line[lead_len] == NUL) 903 || require_blank)) 904 extra_space = TRUE; 905 } 906 break; 907 } 908 if (*p == COM_END) 909 { 910 /* 911 * Doing "o" on the end of a comment does not insert leader. 912 * Remember where the end is, might want to use it to find the 913 * start (for C-comments). 914 */ 915 if (dir == FORWARD) 916 { 917 comment_end = skipwhite(saved_line); 918 lead_len = 0; 919 break; 920 } 921 922 /* 923 * Doing "O" on the end of a comment inserts the middle leader. 924 * Find the string for the middle leader, searching backwards. 925 */ 926 while (p > curbuf->b_p_com && *p != ',') 927 --p; 928 for (lead_repl = p; lead_repl > curbuf->b_p_com 929 && lead_repl[-1] != ':'; --lead_repl) 930 ; 931 lead_repl_len = (int)(p - lead_repl); 932 933 /* We can probably always add an extra space when doing "O" on 934 * the comment-end */ 935 extra_space = TRUE; 936 937 /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */ 938 for (p2 = p; *p2 && *p2 != ':'; p2++) 939 { 940 if (*p2 == COM_AUTO_END) 941 end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */ 942 } 943 if (end_comment_pending == -1) 944 { 945 /* Find last character in end-comment string */ 946 while (*p2 && *p2 != ',') 947 p2++; 948 end_comment_pending = p2[-1]; 949 } 950 break; 951 } 952 if (*p == COM_FIRST) 953 { 954 /* 955 * Comment leader for first line only: Don't repeat leader 956 * when using "O", blank out leader when using "o". 957 */ 958 if (dir == BACKWARD) 959 lead_len = 0; 960 else 961 { 962 lead_repl = (char_u *)""; 963 lead_repl_len = 0; 964 } 965 break; 966 } 967 } 968 if (lead_len) 969 { 970 /* allocate buffer (may concatenate p_exta later) */ 971 leader = alloc(lead_len + lead_repl_len + extra_space + 972 extra_len + 1); 973 allocated = leader; /* remember to free it later */ 974 975 if (leader == NULL) 976 lead_len = 0; 977 else 978 { 979 vim_strncpy(leader, saved_line, lead_len); 980 981 /* 982 * Replace leader with lead_repl, right or left adjusted 983 */ 984 if (lead_repl != NULL) 985 { 986 int c = 0; 987 int off = 0; 988 989 for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p) 990 { 991 if (*p == COM_RIGHT || *p == COM_LEFT) 992 c = *p; 993 else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-') 994 off = getdigits(&p); 995 } 996 if (c == COM_RIGHT) /* right adjusted leader */ 997 { 998 /* find last non-white in the leader to line up with */ 999 for (p = leader + lead_len - 1; p > leader 1000 && vim_iswhite(*p); --p) 1001 ; 1002 ++p; 1003 1004 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1005 /* Compute the length of the replaced characters in 1006 * screen characters, not bytes. */ 1007 { 1008 int repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl, 1009 lead_repl_len); 1010 int old_size = 0; 1011 char_u *endp = p; 1012 int l; 1013 1014 while (old_size < repl_size && p > leader) 1015 { 1016 mb_ptr_back(leader, p); 1017 old_size += ptr2cells(p); 1018 } 1019 l = lead_repl_len - (endp - p); 1020 if (l != 0) 1021 mch_memmove(endp + l, endp, 1022 (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - endp)); 1023 lead_len += l; 1024 } 1025 #else 1026 if (p < leader + lead_repl_len) 1027 p = leader; 1028 else 1029 p -= lead_repl_len; 1030 #endif 1031 mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len); 1032 if (p + lead_repl_len > leader + lead_len) 1033 p[lead_repl_len] = NUL; 1034 1035 /* blank-out any other chars from the old leader. */ 1036 while (--p >= leader) 1037 { 1038 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1039 int l = mb_head_off(leader, p); 1040 1041 if (l > 1) 1042 { 1043 p -= l; 1044 if (ptr2cells(p) > 1) 1045 { 1046 p[1] = ' '; 1047 --l; 1048 } 1049 mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l + 1, 1050 (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - (p + l + 1))); 1051 lead_len -= l; 1052 *p = ' '; 1053 } 1054 else 1055 #endif 1056 if (!vim_iswhite(*p)) 1057 *p = ' '; 1058 } 1059 } 1060 else /* left adjusted leader */ 1061 { 1062 p = skipwhite(leader); 1063 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1064 /* Compute the length of the replaced characters in 1065 * screen characters, not bytes. Move the part that is 1066 * not to be overwritten. */ 1067 { 1068 int repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl, 1069 lead_repl_len); 1070 int i; 1071 int l; 1072 1073 for (i = 0; p[i] != NUL && i < lead_len; i += l) 1074 { 1075 l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p + i); 1076 if (vim_strnsize(p, i + l) > repl_size) 1077 break; 1078 } 1079 if (i != lead_repl_len) 1080 { 1081 mch_memmove(p + lead_repl_len, p + i, 1082 (size_t)(lead_len - i - (leader - p))); 1083 lead_len += lead_repl_len - i; 1084 } 1085 } 1086 #endif 1087 mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len); 1088 1089 /* Replace any remaining non-white chars in the old 1090 * leader by spaces. Keep Tabs, the indent must 1091 * remain the same. */ 1092 for (p += lead_repl_len; p < leader + lead_len; ++p) 1093 if (!vim_iswhite(*p)) 1094 { 1095 /* Don't put a space before a TAB. */ 1096 if (p + 1 < leader + lead_len && p[1] == TAB) 1097 { 1098 --lead_len; 1099 mch_memmove(p, p + 1, 1100 (leader + lead_len) - p); 1101 } 1102 else 1103 { 1104 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1105 int l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p); 1106 1107 if (l > 1) 1108 { 1109 if (ptr2cells(p) > 1) 1110 { 1111 /* Replace a double-wide char with 1112 * two spaces */ 1113 --l; 1114 *p++ = ' '; 1115 } 1116 mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l, 1117 (leader + lead_len) - p); 1118 lead_len -= l - 1; 1119 } 1120 #endif 1121 *p = ' '; 1122 } 1123 } 1124 *p = NUL; 1125 } 1126 1127 /* Recompute the indent, it may have changed. */ 1128 if (curbuf->b_p_ai 1129 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1130 || do_si 1131 #endif 1132 ) 1133 newindent = get_indent_str(leader, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 1134 1135 /* Add the indent offset */ 1136 if (newindent + off < 0) 1137 { 1138 off = -newindent; 1139 newindent = 0; 1140 } 1141 else 1142 newindent += off; 1143 1144 /* Correct trailing spaces for the shift, so that 1145 * alignment remains equal. */ 1146 while (off > 0 && lead_len > 0 1147 && leader[lead_len - 1] == ' ') 1148 { 1149 /* Don't do it when there is a tab before the space */ 1150 if (vim_strchr(skipwhite(leader), '\t') != NULL) 1151 break; 1152 --lead_len; 1153 --off; 1154 } 1155 1156 /* If the leader ends in white space, don't add an 1157 * extra space */ 1158 if (lead_len > 0 && vim_iswhite(leader[lead_len - 1])) 1159 extra_space = FALSE; 1160 leader[lead_len] = NUL; 1161 } 1162 1163 if (extra_space) 1164 { 1165 leader[lead_len++] = ' '; 1166 leader[lead_len] = NUL; 1167 } 1168 1169 newcol = lead_len; 1170 1171 /* 1172 * if a new indent will be set below, remove the indent that 1173 * is in the comment leader 1174 */ 1175 if (newindent 1176 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1177 || did_si 1178 #endif 1179 ) 1180 { 1181 while (lead_len && vim_iswhite(*leader)) 1182 { 1183 --lead_len; 1184 --newcol; 1185 ++leader; 1186 } 1187 } 1188 1189 } 1190 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1191 did_si = can_si = FALSE; 1192 #endif 1193 } 1194 else if (comment_end != NULL) 1195 { 1196 /* 1197 * We have finished a comment, so we don't use the leader. 1198 * If this was a C-comment and 'ai' or 'si' is set do a normal 1199 * indent to align with the line containing the start of the 1200 * comment. 1201 */ 1202 if (comment_end[0] == '*' && comment_end[1] == '/' && 1203 (curbuf->b_p_ai 1204 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1205 || do_si 1206 #endif 1207 )) 1208 { 1209 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor; 1210 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(comment_end - saved_line); 1211 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL) 1212 { 1213 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum; 1214 newindent = get_indent(); 1215 } 1216 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor; 1217 } 1218 } 1219 } 1220 #endif 1221 1222 /* (State == INSERT || State == REPLACE), only when dir == FORWARD */ 1223 if (p_extra != NULL) 1224 { 1225 *p_extra = saved_char; /* restore char that NUL replaced */ 1226 1227 /* 1228 * When 'ai' set or "flags" has OPENLINE_DELSPACES, skip to the first 1229 * non-blank. 1230 * 1231 * When in REPLACE mode, put the deleted blanks on the replace stack, 1232 * preceded by a NUL, so they can be put back when a BS is entered. 1233 */ 1234 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State)) 1235 replace_push(NUL); /* end of extra blanks */ 1236 if (curbuf->b_p_ai || (flags & OPENLINE_DELSPACES)) 1237 { 1238 while ((*p_extra == ' ' || *p_extra == '\t') 1239 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1240 && (!enc_utf8 1241 || !utf_iscomposing(utf_ptr2char(p_extra + 1))) 1242 #endif 1243 ) 1244 { 1245 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State)) 1246 replace_push(*p_extra); 1247 ++p_extra; 1248 ++less_cols_off; 1249 } 1250 } 1251 if (*p_extra != NUL) 1252 did_ai = FALSE; /* append some text, don't truncate now */ 1253 1254 /* columns for marks adjusted for removed columns */ 1255 less_cols = (int)(p_extra - saved_line); 1256 } 1257 1258 if (p_extra == NULL) 1259 p_extra = (char_u *)""; /* append empty line */ 1260 1261 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 1262 /* concatenate leader and p_extra, if there is a leader */ 1263 if (lead_len) 1264 { 1265 STRCAT(leader, p_extra); 1266 p_extra = leader; 1267 did_ai = TRUE; /* So truncating blanks works with comments */ 1268 less_cols -= lead_len; 1269 } 1270 else 1271 end_comment_pending = NUL; /* turns out there was no leader */ 1272 #endif 1273 1274 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor; 1275 if (dir == BACKWARD) 1276 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 1277 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE 1278 if (!(State & VREPLACE_FLAG) || old_cursor.lnum >= orig_line_count) 1279 #endif 1280 { 1281 if (ml_append(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, (colnr_T)0, FALSE) 1282 == FAIL) 1283 goto theend; 1284 /* Postpone calling changed_lines(), because it would mess up folding 1285 * with markers. */ 1286 mark_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, 1L, 0L); 1287 did_append = TRUE; 1288 } 1289 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE 1290 else 1291 { 1292 /* 1293 * In VREPLACE mode we are starting to replace the next line. 1294 */ 1295 curwin->w_cursor.lnum++; 1296 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= Insstart.lnum + vr_lines_changed) 1297 { 1298 /* In case we NL to a new line, BS to the previous one, and NL 1299 * again, we don't want to save the new line for undo twice. 1300 */ 1301 (void)u_save_cursor(); /* errors are ignored! */ 1302 vr_lines_changed++; 1303 } 1304 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, TRUE); 1305 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0); 1306 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--; 1307 did_append = FALSE; 1308 } 1309 #endif 1310 1311 if (newindent 1312 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1313 || did_si 1314 #endif 1315 ) 1316 { 1317 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 1318 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1319 if (did_si) 1320 { 1321 if (p_sr) 1322 newindent -= newindent % (int)curbuf->b_p_sw; 1323 newindent += (int)curbuf->b_p_sw; 1324 } 1325 #endif 1326 /* Copy the indent only if expand tab is disabled */ 1327 if (curbuf->b_p_ci && !curbuf->b_p_et) 1328 { 1329 (void)copy_indent(newindent, saved_line); 1330 1331 /* 1332 * Set the 'preserveindent' option so that any further screwing 1333 * with the line doesn't entirely destroy our efforts to preserve 1334 * it. It gets restored at the function end. 1335 */ 1336 curbuf->b_p_pi = TRUE; 1337 } 1338 else 1339 (void)set_indent(newindent, SIN_INSERT); 1340 less_cols -= curwin->w_cursor.col; 1341 1342 ai_col = curwin->w_cursor.col; 1343 1344 /* 1345 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the new indent, there must 1346 * be a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS 1347 */ 1348 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State)) 1349 for (n = 0; n < (int)curwin->w_cursor.col; ++n) 1350 replace_push(NUL); 1351 newcol += curwin->w_cursor.col; 1352 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1353 if (no_si) 1354 did_si = FALSE; 1355 #endif 1356 } 1357 1358 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 1359 /* 1360 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the extra leader, there must be 1361 * a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS. 1362 */ 1363 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State)) 1364 while (lead_len-- > 0) 1365 replace_push(NUL); 1366 #endif 1367 1368 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor; 1369 1370 if (dir == FORWARD) 1371 { 1372 if (trunc_line || (State & INSERT)) 1373 { 1374 /* truncate current line at cursor */ 1375 saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL; 1376 /* Remove trailing white space, unless OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL used. */ 1377 if (trunc_line && !(flags & OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL)) 1378 truncate_spaces(saved_line); 1379 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, saved_line, FALSE); 1380 saved_line = NULL; 1381 if (did_append) 1382 { 1383 changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col, 1384 curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, 1L); 1385 did_append = FALSE; 1386 1387 /* Move marks after the line break to the new line. */ 1388 if (flags & OPENLINE_MARKFIX) 1389 mark_col_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 1390 curwin->w_cursor.col + less_cols_off, 1391 1L, (long)-less_cols); 1392 } 1393 else 1394 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col); 1395 } 1396 1397 /* 1398 * Put the cursor on the new line. Careful: the scrollup() above may 1399 * have moved w_cursor, we must use old_cursor. 1400 */ 1401 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = old_cursor.lnum + 1; 1402 } 1403 if (did_append) 1404 changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 1L); 1405 1406 curwin->w_cursor.col = newcol; 1407 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 1408 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0; 1409 #endif 1410 1411 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT)) 1412 /* 1413 * In VREPLACE mode, we are handling the replace stack ourselves, so stop 1414 * fixthisline() from doing it (via change_indent()) by telling it we're in 1415 * normal INSERT mode. 1416 */ 1417 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG) 1418 { 1419 vreplace_mode = State; /* So we know to put things right later */ 1420 State = INSERT; 1421 } 1422 else 1423 vreplace_mode = 0; 1424 #endif 1425 #ifdef FEAT_LISP 1426 /* 1427 * May do lisp indenting. 1428 */ 1429 if (!p_paste 1430 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 1431 && leader == NULL 1432 # endif 1433 && curbuf->b_p_lisp 1434 && curbuf->b_p_ai) 1435 { 1436 fixthisline(get_lisp_indent); 1437 p = ml_get_curline(); 1438 ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p); 1439 } 1440 #endif 1441 #ifdef FEAT_CINDENT 1442 /* 1443 * May do indenting after opening a new line. 1444 */ 1445 if (!p_paste 1446 && (curbuf->b_p_cin 1447 # ifdef FEAT_EVAL 1448 || *curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL 1449 # endif 1450 ) 1451 && in_cinkeys(dir == FORWARD 1452 ? KEY_OPEN_FORW 1453 : KEY_OPEN_BACK, ' ', linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum))) 1454 { 1455 do_c_expr_indent(); 1456 p = ml_get_curline(); 1457 ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p); 1458 } 1459 #endif 1460 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT)) 1461 if (vreplace_mode != 0) 1462 State = vreplace_mode; 1463 #endif 1464 1465 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE 1466 /* 1467 * Finally, VREPLACE gets the stuff on the new line, then puts back the 1468 * original line, and inserts the new stuff char by char, pushing old stuff 1469 * onto the replace stack (via ins_char()). 1470 */ 1471 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG) 1472 { 1473 /* Put new line in p_extra */ 1474 p_extra = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline()); 1475 if (p_extra == NULL) 1476 goto theend; 1477 1478 /* Put back original line */ 1479 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, next_line, FALSE); 1480 1481 /* Insert new stuff into line again */ 1482 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 1483 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 1484 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0; 1485 #endif 1486 ins_bytes(p_extra); /* will call changed_bytes() */ 1487 vim_free(p_extra); 1488 next_line = NULL; 1489 } 1490 #endif 1491 1492 retval = TRUE; /* success! */ 1493 theend: 1494 curbuf->b_p_pi = saved_pi; 1495 vim_free(saved_line); 1496 vim_free(next_line); 1497 vim_free(allocated); 1498 return retval; 1499 } 1500 1501 #if defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(PROTO) 1502 /* 1503 * get_leader_len() returns the length of the prefix of the given string 1504 * which introduces a comment. If this string is not a comment then 0 is 1505 * returned. 1506 * When "flags" is not NULL, it is set to point to the flags of the recognized 1507 * comment leader. 1508 * "backward" must be true for the "O" command. 1509 */ 1510 int 1511 get_leader_len(line, flags, backward) 1512 char_u *line; 1513 char_u **flags; 1514 int backward; 1515 { 1516 int i, j; 1517 int got_com = FALSE; 1518 int found_one; 1519 char_u part_buf[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* buffer for one option part */ 1520 char_u *string; /* pointer to comment string */ 1521 char_u *list; 1522 1523 i = 0; 1524 while (vim_iswhite(line[i])) /* leading white space is ignored */ 1525 ++i; 1526 1527 /* 1528 * Repeat to match several nested comment strings. 1529 */ 1530 while (line[i]) 1531 { 1532 /* 1533 * scan through the 'comments' option for a match 1534 */ 1535 found_one = FALSE; 1536 for (list = curbuf->b_p_com; *list; ) 1537 { 1538 /* 1539 * Get one option part into part_buf[]. Advance list to next one. 1540 * put string at start of string. 1541 */ 1542 if (!got_com && flags != NULL) /* remember where flags started */ 1543 *flags = list; 1544 (void)copy_option_part(&list, part_buf, COM_MAX_LEN, ","); 1545 string = vim_strchr(part_buf, ':'); 1546 if (string == NULL) /* missing ':', ignore this part */ 1547 continue; 1548 *string++ = NUL; /* isolate flags from string */ 1549 1550 /* 1551 * When already found a nested comment, only accept further 1552 * nested comments. 1553 */ 1554 if (got_com && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL) 1555 continue; 1556 1557 /* When 'O' flag used don't use for "O" command */ 1558 if (backward && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NOBACK) != NULL) 1559 continue; 1560 1561 /* 1562 * Line contents and string must match. 1563 * When string starts with white space, must have some white space 1564 * (but the amount does not need to match, there might be a mix of 1565 * TABs and spaces). 1566 */ 1567 if (vim_iswhite(string[0])) 1568 { 1569 if (i == 0 || !vim_iswhite(line[i - 1])) 1570 continue; 1571 while (vim_iswhite(string[0])) 1572 ++string; 1573 } 1574 for (j = 0; string[j] != NUL && string[j] == line[i + j]; ++j) 1575 ; 1576 if (string[j] != NUL) 1577 continue; 1578 1579 /* 1580 * When 'b' flag used, there must be white space or an 1581 * end-of-line after the string in the line. 1582 */ 1583 if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_BLANK) != NULL 1584 && !vim_iswhite(line[i + j]) && line[i + j] != NUL) 1585 continue; 1586 1587 /* 1588 * We have found a match, stop searching. 1589 */ 1590 i += j; 1591 got_com = TRUE; 1592 found_one = TRUE; 1593 break; 1594 } 1595 1596 /* 1597 * No match found, stop scanning. 1598 */ 1599 if (!found_one) 1600 break; 1601 1602 /* 1603 * Include any trailing white space. 1604 */ 1605 while (vim_iswhite(line[i])) 1606 ++i; 1607 1608 /* 1609 * If this comment doesn't nest, stop here. 1610 */ 1611 if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL) 1612 break; 1613 } 1614 return (got_com ? i : 0); 1615 } 1616 #endif 1617 1618 /* 1619 * Return the number of window lines occupied by buffer line "lnum". 1620 */ 1621 int 1622 plines(lnum) 1623 linenr_T lnum; 1624 { 1625 return plines_win(curwin, lnum, TRUE); 1626 } 1627 1628 int 1629 plines_win(wp, lnum, winheight) 1630 win_T *wp; 1631 linenr_T lnum; 1632 int winheight; /* when TRUE limit to window height */ 1633 { 1634 #if defined(FEAT_DIFF) || defined(PROTO) 1635 /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line. When folded the result 1636 * is one line anyway. */ 1637 return plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight) + diff_check_fill(wp, lnum); 1638 } 1639 1640 int 1641 plines_nofill(lnum) 1642 linenr_T lnum; 1643 { 1644 return plines_win_nofill(curwin, lnum, TRUE); 1645 } 1646 1647 int 1648 plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight) 1649 win_T *wp; 1650 linenr_T lnum; 1651 int winheight; /* when TRUE limit to window height */ 1652 { 1653 #endif 1654 int lines; 1655 1656 if (!wp->w_p_wrap) 1657 return 1; 1658 1659 #ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT 1660 if (wp->w_width == 0) 1661 return 1; 1662 #endif 1663 1664 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING 1665 /* A folded lines is handled just like an empty line. */ 1666 /* NOTE: Caller must handle lines that are MAYBE folded. */ 1667 if (lineFolded(wp, lnum) == TRUE) 1668 return 1; 1669 #endif 1670 1671 lines = plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum); 1672 if (winheight > 0 && lines > wp->w_height) 1673 return (int)wp->w_height; 1674 return lines; 1675 } 1676 1677 /* 1678 * Return number of window lines physical line "lnum" will occupy in window 1679 * "wp". Does not care about folding, 'wrap' or 'diff'. 1680 */ 1681 int 1682 plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum) 1683 win_T *wp; 1684 linenr_T lnum; 1685 { 1686 char_u *s; 1687 long col; 1688 int width; 1689 1690 s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE); 1691 if (*s == NUL) /* empty line */ 1692 return 1; 1693 col = win_linetabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)MAXCOL); 1694 1695 /* 1696 * If list mode is on, then the '$' at the end of the line may take up one 1697 * extra column. 1698 */ 1699 if (wp->w_p_list && lcs_eol != NUL) 1700 col += 1; 1701 1702 /* 1703 * Add column offset for 'number' and 'foldcolumn'. 1704 */ 1705 width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp); 1706 if (width <= 0) 1707 return 32000; 1708 if (col <= width) 1709 return 1; 1710 col -= width; 1711 width += win_col_off2(wp); 1712 return (col + (width - 1)) / width + 1; 1713 } 1714 1715 /* 1716 * Like plines_win(), but only reports the number of physical screen lines 1717 * used from the start of the line to the given column number. 1718 */ 1719 int 1720 plines_win_col(wp, lnum, column) 1721 win_T *wp; 1722 linenr_T lnum; 1723 long column; 1724 { 1725 long col; 1726 char_u *s; 1727 int lines = 0; 1728 int width; 1729 1730 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF 1731 /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line. When folded the result 1732 * is one line anyway. */ 1733 lines = diff_check_fill(wp, lnum); 1734 #endif 1735 1736 if (!wp->w_p_wrap) 1737 return lines + 1; 1738 1739 #ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT 1740 if (wp->w_width == 0) 1741 return lines + 1; 1742 #endif 1743 1744 s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE); 1745 1746 col = 0; 1747 while (*s != NUL && --column >= 0) 1748 { 1749 col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL); 1750 mb_ptr_adv(s); 1751 } 1752 1753 /* 1754 * If *s is a TAB, and the TAB is not displayed as ^I, and we're not in 1755 * INSERT mode, then col must be adjusted so that it represents the last 1756 * screen position of the TAB. This only fixes an error when the TAB wraps 1757 * from one screen line to the next (when 'columns' is not a multiple of 1758 * 'ts') -- webb. 1759 */ 1760 if (*s == TAB && (State & NORMAL) && (!wp->w_p_list || lcs_tab1)) 1761 col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL) - 1; 1762 1763 /* 1764 * Add column offset for 'number', 'foldcolumn', etc. 1765 */ 1766 width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp); 1767 if (width > 0) 1768 { 1769 lines += 1; 1770 if (col >= width) 1771 lines += (col - width) / (width + win_col_off2(wp)); 1772 if (lines <= wp->w_height) 1773 return lines; 1774 } 1775 return (int)(wp->w_height); /* maximum length */ 1776 } 1777 1778 int 1779 plines_m_win(wp, first, last) 1780 win_T *wp; 1781 linenr_T first, last; 1782 { 1783 int count = 0; 1784 1785 while (first <= last) 1786 { 1787 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING 1788 int x; 1789 1790 /* Check if there are any really folded lines, but also included lines 1791 * that are maybe folded. */ 1792 x = foldedCount(wp, first, NULL); 1793 if (x > 0) 1794 { 1795 ++count; /* count 1 for "+-- folded" line */ 1796 first += x; 1797 } 1798 else 1799 #endif 1800 { 1801 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF 1802 if (first == wp->w_topline) 1803 count += plines_win_nofill(wp, first, TRUE) + wp->w_topfill; 1804 else 1805 #endif 1806 count += plines_win(wp, first, TRUE); 1807 ++first; 1808 } 1809 } 1810 return (count); 1811 } 1812 1813 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) || defined(PROTO) 1814 /* 1815 * Insert string "p" at the cursor position. Stops at a NUL byte. 1816 * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters. 1817 */ 1818 void 1819 ins_bytes(p) 1820 char_u *p; 1821 { 1822 ins_bytes_len(p, (int)STRLEN(p)); 1823 } 1824 #endif 1825 1826 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) \ 1827 || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO) 1828 /* 1829 * Insert string "p" with length "len" at the cursor position. 1830 * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters. 1831 */ 1832 void 1833 ins_bytes_len(p, len) 1834 char_u *p; 1835 int len; 1836 { 1837 int i; 1838 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1839 int n; 1840 1841 for (i = 0; i < len; i += n) 1842 { 1843 n = (*mb_ptr2len)(p + i); 1844 ins_char_bytes(p + i, n); 1845 } 1846 # else 1847 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i) 1848 ins_char(p[i]); 1849 # endif 1850 } 1851 #endif 1852 1853 /* 1854 * Insert or replace a single character at the cursor position. 1855 * When in REPLACE or VREPLACE mode, replace any existing character. 1856 * Caller must have prepared for undo. 1857 * For multi-byte characters we get the whole character, the caller must 1858 * convert bytes to a character. 1859 */ 1860 void 1861 ins_char(c) 1862 int c; 1863 { 1864 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO) 1865 char_u buf[MB_MAXBYTES]; 1866 int n; 1867 1868 n = (*mb_char2bytes)(c, buf); 1869 1870 /* When "c" is 0x100, 0x200, etc. we don't want to insert a NUL byte. 1871 * Happens for CTRL-Vu9900. */ 1872 if (buf[0] == 0) 1873 buf[0] = '\n'; 1874 1875 ins_char_bytes(buf, n); 1876 } 1877 1878 void 1879 ins_char_bytes(buf, charlen) 1880 char_u *buf; 1881 int charlen; 1882 { 1883 int c = buf[0]; 1884 int l, j; 1885 #endif 1886 int newlen; /* nr of bytes inserted */ 1887 int oldlen; /* nr of bytes deleted (0 when not replacing) */ 1888 char_u *p; 1889 char_u *newp; 1890 char_u *oldp; 1891 int linelen; /* length of old line including NUL */ 1892 colnr_T col; 1893 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 1894 int i; 1895 1896 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 1897 /* Break tabs if needed. */ 1898 if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0) 1899 coladvance_force(getviscol()); 1900 #endif 1901 1902 col = curwin->w_cursor.col; 1903 oldp = ml_get(lnum); 1904 linelen = (int)STRLEN(oldp) + 1; 1905 1906 /* The lengths default to the values for when not replacing. */ 1907 oldlen = 0; 1908 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1909 newlen = charlen; 1910 #else 1911 newlen = 1; 1912 #endif 1913 1914 if (State & REPLACE_FLAG) 1915 { 1916 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE 1917 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG) 1918 { 1919 colnr_T new_vcol = 0; /* init for GCC */ 1920 colnr_T vcol; 1921 int old_list; 1922 #ifndef FEAT_MBYTE 1923 char_u buf[2]; 1924 #endif 1925 1926 /* 1927 * Disable 'list' temporarily, unless 'cpo' contains the 'L' flag. 1928 * Returns the old value of list, so when finished, 1929 * curwin->w_p_list should be set back to this. 1930 */ 1931 old_list = curwin->w_p_list; 1932 if (old_list && vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISTWM) == NULL) 1933 curwin->w_p_list = FALSE; 1934 1935 /* 1936 * In virtual replace mode each character may replace one or more 1937 * characters (zero if it's a TAB). Count the number of bytes to 1938 * be deleted to make room for the new character, counting screen 1939 * cells. May result in adding spaces to fill a gap. 1940 */ 1941 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, NULL, &vcol, NULL); 1942 #ifndef FEAT_MBYTE 1943 buf[0] = c; 1944 buf[1] = NUL; 1945 #endif 1946 new_vcol = vcol + chartabsize(buf, vcol); 1947 while (oldp[col + oldlen] != NUL && vcol < new_vcol) 1948 { 1949 vcol += chartabsize(oldp + col + oldlen, vcol); 1950 /* Don't need to remove a TAB that takes us to the right 1951 * position. */ 1952 if (vcol > new_vcol && oldp[col + oldlen] == TAB) 1953 break; 1954 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1955 oldlen += (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col + oldlen); 1956 #else 1957 ++oldlen; 1958 #endif 1959 /* Deleted a bit too much, insert spaces. */ 1960 if (vcol > new_vcol) 1961 newlen += vcol - new_vcol; 1962 } 1963 curwin->w_p_list = old_list; 1964 } 1965 else 1966 #endif 1967 if (oldp[col] != NUL) 1968 { 1969 /* normal replace */ 1970 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1971 oldlen = (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col); 1972 #else 1973 oldlen = 1; 1974 #endif 1975 } 1976 1977 1978 /* Push the replaced bytes onto the replace stack, so that they can be 1979 * put back when BS is used. The bytes of a multi-byte character are 1980 * done the other way around, so that the first byte is popped off 1981 * first (it tells the byte length of the character). */ 1982 replace_push(NUL); 1983 for (i = 0; i < oldlen; ++i) 1984 { 1985 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1986 l = (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col + i) - 1; 1987 for (j = l; j >= 0; --j) 1988 replace_push(oldp[col + i + j]); 1989 i += l; 1990 #else 1991 replace_push(oldp[col + i]); 1992 #endif 1993 } 1994 } 1995 1996 newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(linelen + newlen - oldlen)); 1997 if (newp == NULL) 1998 return; 1999 2000 /* Copy bytes before the cursor. */ 2001 if (col > 0) 2002 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col); 2003 2004 /* Copy bytes after the changed character(s). */ 2005 p = newp + col; 2006 mch_memmove(p + newlen, oldp + col + oldlen, 2007 (size_t)(linelen - col - oldlen)); 2008 2009 /* Insert or overwrite the new character. */ 2010 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2011 mch_memmove(p, buf, charlen); 2012 i = charlen; 2013 #else 2014 *p = c; 2015 i = 1; 2016 #endif 2017 2018 /* Fill with spaces when necessary. */ 2019 while (i < newlen) 2020 p[i++] = ' '; 2021 2022 /* Replace the line in the buffer. */ 2023 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE); 2024 2025 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */ 2026 changed_bytes(lnum, col); 2027 2028 /* 2029 * If we're in Insert or Replace mode and 'showmatch' is set, then briefly 2030 * show the match for right parens and braces. 2031 */ 2032 if (p_sm && (State & INSERT) 2033 && msg_silent == 0 2034 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2035 && charlen == 1 2036 #endif 2037 ) 2038 showmatch(c); 2039 2040 #ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT 2041 if (!p_ri || (State & REPLACE_FLAG)) 2042 #endif 2043 { 2044 /* Normal insert: move cursor right */ 2045 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2046 curwin->w_cursor.col += charlen; 2047 #else 2048 ++curwin->w_cursor.col; 2049 #endif 2050 } 2051 /* 2052 * TODO: should try to update w_row here, to avoid recomputing it later. 2053 */ 2054 } 2055 2056 /* 2057 * Insert a string at the cursor position. 2058 * Note: Does NOT handle Replace mode. 2059 * Caller must have prepared for undo. 2060 */ 2061 void 2062 ins_str(s) 2063 char_u *s; 2064 { 2065 char_u *oldp, *newp; 2066 int newlen = (int)STRLEN(s); 2067 int oldlen; 2068 colnr_T col; 2069 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 2070 2071 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 2072 if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0) 2073 coladvance_force(getviscol()); 2074 #endif 2075 2076 col = curwin->w_cursor.col; 2077 oldp = ml_get(lnum); 2078 oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp); 2079 2080 newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(oldlen + newlen + 1)); 2081 if (newp == NULL) 2082 return; 2083 if (col > 0) 2084 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col); 2085 mch_memmove(newp + col, s, (size_t)newlen); 2086 mch_memmove(newp + col + newlen, oldp + col, (size_t)(oldlen - col + 1)); 2087 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE); 2088 changed_bytes(lnum, col); 2089 curwin->w_cursor.col += newlen; 2090 } 2091 2092 /* 2093 * Delete one character under the cursor. 2094 * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line. 2095 * Caller must have prepared for undo. 2096 * 2097 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise 2098 */ 2099 int 2100 del_char(fixpos) 2101 int fixpos; 2102 { 2103 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2104 if (has_mbyte) 2105 { 2106 /* Make sure the cursor is at the start of a character. */ 2107 mb_adjust_cursor(); 2108 if (*ml_get_cursor() == NUL) 2109 return FAIL; 2110 return del_chars(1L, fixpos); 2111 } 2112 #endif 2113 return del_bytes(1L, fixpos); 2114 } 2115 2116 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO) 2117 /* 2118 * Like del_bytes(), but delete characters instead of bytes. 2119 */ 2120 int 2121 del_chars(count, fixpos) 2122 long count; 2123 int fixpos; 2124 { 2125 long bytes = 0; 2126 long i; 2127 char_u *p; 2128 int l; 2129 2130 p = ml_get_cursor(); 2131 for (i = 0; i < count && *p != NUL; ++i) 2132 { 2133 l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p); 2134 bytes += l; 2135 p += l; 2136 } 2137 return del_bytes(bytes, fixpos); 2138 } 2139 #endif 2140 2141 /* 2142 * Delete "count" bytes under the cursor. 2143 * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line. 2144 * Caller must have prepared for undo. 2145 * 2146 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise 2147 */ 2148 int 2149 del_bytes(count, fixpos) 2150 long count; 2151 int fixpos; 2152 { 2153 char_u *oldp, *newp; 2154 colnr_T oldlen; 2155 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 2156 colnr_T col = curwin->w_cursor.col; 2157 int was_alloced; 2158 long movelen; 2159 2160 oldp = ml_get(lnum); 2161 oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp); 2162 2163 /* 2164 * Can't do anything when the cursor is on the NUL after the line. 2165 */ 2166 if (col >= oldlen) 2167 return FAIL; 2168 2169 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2170 /* If 'delcombine' is set and deleting (less than) one character, only 2171 * delete the last combining character. */ 2172 if (p_deco && enc_utf8 && utfc_ptr2len(oldp + col) >= count) 2173 { 2174 int c1, c2; 2175 int n; 2176 2177 (void)utfc_ptr2char(oldp + col, &c1, &c2); 2178 if (c1 != NUL) 2179 { 2180 /* Find the last composing char, there can be several. */ 2181 n = col; 2182 do 2183 { 2184 col = n; 2185 count = utf_ptr2len(oldp + n); 2186 n += count; 2187 } while (UTF_COMPOSINGLIKE(oldp + col, oldp + n)); 2188 fixpos = 0; 2189 } 2190 } 2191 #endif 2192 2193 /* 2194 * When count is too big, reduce it. 2195 */ 2196 movelen = (long)oldlen - (long)col - count + 1; /* includes trailing NUL */ 2197 if (movelen <= 1) 2198 { 2199 /* 2200 * If we just took off the last character of a non-blank line, and 2201 * fixpos is TRUE, we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL. 2202 */ 2203 if (col > 0 && fixpos) 2204 { 2205 --curwin->w_cursor.col; 2206 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 2207 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0; 2208 #endif 2209 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2210 if (has_mbyte) 2211 curwin->w_cursor.col -= 2212 (*mb_head_off)(oldp, oldp + curwin->w_cursor.col); 2213 #endif 2214 } 2215 count = oldlen - col; 2216 movelen = 1; 2217 } 2218 2219 /* 2220 * If the old line has been allocated the deletion can be done in the 2221 * existing line. Otherwise a new line has to be allocated 2222 */ 2223 was_alloced = ml_line_alloced(); /* check if oldp was allocated */ 2224 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG 2225 if (was_alloced && usingNetbeans) 2226 netbeans_removed(curbuf, lnum, col, count); 2227 /* else is handled by ml_replace() */ 2228 #endif 2229 if (was_alloced) 2230 newp = oldp; /* use same allocated memory */ 2231 else 2232 { /* need to allocate a new line */ 2233 newp = alloc((unsigned)(oldlen + 1 - count)); 2234 if (newp == NULL) 2235 return FAIL; 2236 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col); 2237 } 2238 mch_memmove(newp + col, oldp + col + count, (size_t)movelen); 2239 if (!was_alloced) 2240 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE); 2241 2242 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */ 2243 changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col); 2244 2245 return OK; 2246 } 2247 2248 /* 2249 * Delete from cursor to end of line. 2250 * Caller must have prepared for undo. 2251 * 2252 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise 2253 */ 2254 int 2255 truncate_line(fixpos) 2256 int fixpos; /* if TRUE fix the cursor position when done */ 2257 { 2258 char_u *newp; 2259 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 2260 colnr_T col = curwin->w_cursor.col; 2261 2262 if (col == 0) 2263 newp = vim_strsave((char_u *)""); 2264 else 2265 newp = vim_strnsave(ml_get(lnum), col); 2266 2267 if (newp == NULL) 2268 return FAIL; 2269 2270 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE); 2271 2272 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */ 2273 changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col); 2274 2275 /* 2276 * If "fixpos" is TRUE we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL. 2277 */ 2278 if (fixpos && curwin->w_cursor.col > 0) 2279 --curwin->w_cursor.col; 2280 2281 return OK; 2282 } 2283 2284 /* 2285 * Delete "nlines" lines at the cursor. 2286 * Saves the lines for undo first if "undo" is TRUE. 2287 */ 2288 void 2289 del_lines(nlines, undo) 2290 long nlines; /* number of lines to delete */ 2291 int undo; /* if TRUE, prepare for undo */ 2292 { 2293 long n; 2294 2295 if (nlines <= 0) 2296 return; 2297 2298 /* save the deleted lines for undo */ 2299 if (undo && u_savedel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, nlines) == FAIL) 2300 return; 2301 2302 for (n = 0; n < nlines; ) 2303 { 2304 if (curbuf->b_ml.ml_flags & ML_EMPTY) /* nothing to delete */ 2305 break; 2306 2307 ml_delete(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE); 2308 ++n; 2309 2310 /* If we delete the last line in the file, stop */ 2311 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count) 2312 break; 2313 } 2314 /* adjust marks, mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */ 2315 deleted_lines_mark(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, n); 2316 2317 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 2318 check_cursor_lnum(); 2319 } 2320 2321 int 2322 gchar_pos(pos) 2323 pos_T *pos; 2324 { 2325 char_u *ptr = ml_get_pos(pos); 2326 2327 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2328 if (has_mbyte) 2329 return (*mb_ptr2char)(ptr); 2330 #endif 2331 return (int)*ptr; 2332 } 2333 2334 int 2335 gchar_cursor() 2336 { 2337 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2338 if (has_mbyte) 2339 return (*mb_ptr2char)(ml_get_cursor()); 2340 #endif 2341 return (int)*ml_get_cursor(); 2342 } 2343 2344 /* 2345 * Write a character at the current cursor position. 2346 * It is directly written into the block. 2347 */ 2348 void 2349 pchar_cursor(c) 2350 int c; 2351 { 2352 *(ml_get_buf(curbuf, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE) 2353 + curwin->w_cursor.col) = c; 2354 } 2355 2356 #if 0 /* not used */ 2357 /* 2358 * Put *pos at end of current buffer 2359 */ 2360 void 2361 goto_endofbuf(pos) 2362 pos_T *pos; 2363 { 2364 char_u *p; 2365 2366 pos->lnum = curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count; 2367 pos->col = 0; 2368 p = ml_get(pos->lnum); 2369 while (*p++) 2370 ++pos->col; 2371 } 2372 #endif 2373 2374 /* 2375 * When extra == 0: Return TRUE if the cursor is before or on the first 2376 * non-blank in the line. 2377 * When extra == 1: Return TRUE if the cursor is before the first non-blank in 2378 * the line. 2379 */ 2380 int 2381 inindent(extra) 2382 int extra; 2383 { 2384 char_u *ptr; 2385 colnr_T col; 2386 2387 for (col = 0, ptr = ml_get_curline(); vim_iswhite(*ptr); ++col) 2388 ++ptr; 2389 if (col >= curwin->w_cursor.col + extra) 2390 return TRUE; 2391 else 2392 return FALSE; 2393 } 2394 2395 /* 2396 * Skip to next part of an option argument: Skip space and comma. 2397 */ 2398 char_u * 2399 skip_to_option_part(p) 2400 char_u *p; 2401 { 2402 if (*p == ',') 2403 ++p; 2404 while (*p == ' ') 2405 ++p; 2406 return p; 2407 } 2408 2409 /* 2410 * changed() is called when something in the current buffer is changed. 2411 * 2412 * Most often called through changed_bytes() and changed_lines(), which also 2413 * mark the area of the display to be redrawn. 2414 */ 2415 void 2416 changed() 2417 { 2418 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) 2419 /* The text of the preediting area is inserted, but this doesn't 2420 * mean a change of the buffer yet. That is delayed until the 2421 * text is committed. (this means preedit becomes empty) */ 2422 if (im_is_preediting() && !xim_changed_while_preediting) 2423 return; 2424 xim_changed_while_preediting = FALSE; 2425 #endif 2426 2427 if (!curbuf->b_changed) 2428 { 2429 int save_msg_scroll = msg_scroll; 2430 2431 change_warning(0); 2432 /* Create a swap file if that is wanted. 2433 * Don't do this for "nofile" and "nowrite" buffer types. */ 2434 if (curbuf->b_may_swap 2435 #ifdef FEAT_QUICKFIX 2436 && !bt_dontwrite(curbuf) 2437 #endif 2438 ) 2439 { 2440 ml_open_file(curbuf); 2441 2442 /* The ml_open_file() can cause an ATTENTION message. 2443 * Wait two seconds, to make sure the user reads this unexpected 2444 * message. Since we could be anywhere, call wait_return() now, 2445 * and don't let the emsg() set msg_scroll. */ 2446 if (need_wait_return && emsg_silent == 0) 2447 { 2448 out_flush(); 2449 ui_delay(2000L, TRUE); 2450 wait_return(TRUE); 2451 msg_scroll = save_msg_scroll; 2452 } 2453 } 2454 curbuf->b_changed = TRUE; 2455 ml_setflags(curbuf); 2456 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS 2457 check_status(curbuf); 2458 #endif 2459 #ifdef FEAT_TITLE 2460 need_maketitle = TRUE; /* set window title later */ 2461 #endif 2462 } 2463 ++curbuf->b_changedtick; 2464 } 2465 2466 static void changedOneline __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum)); 2467 static void changed_lines_buf __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum, linenr_T lnume, long xtra)); 2468 static void changed_common __ARGS((linenr_T lnum, colnr_T col, linenr_T lnume, long xtra)); 2469 2470 /* 2471 * Changed bytes within a single line for the current buffer. 2472 * - marks the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed 2473 * - marks the buffer changed by calling changed() 2474 * - invalidates cached values 2475 */ 2476 void 2477 changed_bytes(lnum, col) 2478 linenr_T lnum; 2479 colnr_T col; 2480 { 2481 changedOneline(curbuf, lnum); 2482 changed_common(lnum, col, lnum + 1, 0L); 2483 2484 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF 2485 /* Diff highlighting in other diff windows may need to be updated too. */ 2486 if (curwin->w_p_diff) 2487 { 2488 win_T *wp; 2489 linenr_T wlnum; 2490 2491 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next) 2492 if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin) 2493 { 2494 redraw_win_later(wp, VALID); 2495 wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp); 2496 if (wlnum > 0) 2497 changedOneline(wp->w_buffer, wlnum); 2498 } 2499 } 2500 #endif 2501 } 2502 2503 static void 2504 changedOneline(buf, lnum) 2505 buf_T *buf; 2506 linenr_T lnum; 2507 { 2508 if (buf->b_mod_set) 2509 { 2510 /* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */ 2511 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top) 2512 buf->b_mod_top = lnum; 2513 else if (lnum >= buf->b_mod_bot) 2514 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1; 2515 } 2516 else 2517 { 2518 /* set the area that must be redisplayed to one line */ 2519 buf->b_mod_set = TRUE; 2520 buf->b_mod_top = lnum; 2521 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1; 2522 buf->b_mod_xlines = 0; 2523 } 2524 } 2525 2526 /* 2527 * Appended "count" lines below line "lnum" in the current buffer. 2528 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust(). 2529 * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag. 2530 */ 2531 void 2532 appended_lines(lnum, count) 2533 linenr_T lnum; 2534 long count; 2535 { 2536 changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count); 2537 } 2538 2539 /* 2540 * Like appended_lines(), but adjust marks first. 2541 */ 2542 void 2543 appended_lines_mark(lnum, count) 2544 linenr_T lnum; 2545 long count; 2546 { 2547 mark_adjust(lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, count, 0L); 2548 changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count); 2549 } 2550 2551 /* 2552 * Deleted "count" lines at line "lnum" in the current buffer. 2553 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust(). 2554 * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag. 2555 */ 2556 void 2557 deleted_lines(lnum, count) 2558 linenr_T lnum; 2559 long count; 2560 { 2561 changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count); 2562 } 2563 2564 /* 2565 * Like deleted_lines(), but adjust marks first. 2566 */ 2567 void 2568 deleted_lines_mark(lnum, count) 2569 linenr_T lnum; 2570 long count; 2571 { 2572 mark_adjust(lnum, (linenr_T)(lnum + count - 1), (long)MAXLNUM, -count); 2573 changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count); 2574 } 2575 2576 /* 2577 * Changed lines for the current buffer. 2578 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust(). 2579 * - mark the buffer changed by calling changed() 2580 * - mark the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed 2581 * - invalidate cached values 2582 * "lnum" is the first line that needs displaying, "lnume" the first line 2583 * below the changed lines (BEFORE the change). 2584 * When only inserting lines, "lnum" and "lnume" are equal. 2585 * Takes care of calling changed() and updating b_mod_*. 2586 */ 2587 void 2588 changed_lines(lnum, col, lnume, xtra) 2589 linenr_T lnum; /* first line with change */ 2590 colnr_T col; /* column in first line with change */ 2591 linenr_T lnume; /* line below last changed line */ 2592 long xtra; /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */ 2593 { 2594 changed_lines_buf(curbuf, lnum, lnume, xtra); 2595 2596 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF 2597 if (xtra == 0 && curwin->w_p_diff) 2598 { 2599 /* When the number of lines doesn't change then mark_adjust() isn't 2600 * called and other diff buffers still need to be marked for 2601 * displaying. */ 2602 win_T *wp; 2603 linenr_T wlnum; 2604 2605 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next) 2606 if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin) 2607 { 2608 redraw_win_later(wp, VALID); 2609 wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp); 2610 if (wlnum > 0) 2611 changed_lines_buf(wp->w_buffer, wlnum, 2612 lnume - lnum + wlnum, 0L); 2613 } 2614 } 2615 #endif 2616 2617 changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra); 2618 } 2619 2620 static void 2621 changed_lines_buf(buf, lnum, lnume, xtra) 2622 buf_T *buf; 2623 linenr_T lnum; /* first line with change */ 2624 linenr_T lnume; /* line below last changed line */ 2625 long xtra; /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */ 2626 { 2627 if (buf->b_mod_set) 2628 { 2629 /* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */ 2630 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top) 2631 buf->b_mod_top = lnum; 2632 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_bot) 2633 { 2634 /* adjust old bot position for xtra lines */ 2635 buf->b_mod_bot += xtra; 2636 if (buf->b_mod_bot < lnum) 2637 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum; 2638 } 2639 if (lnume + xtra > buf->b_mod_bot) 2640 buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra; 2641 buf->b_mod_xlines += xtra; 2642 } 2643 else 2644 { 2645 /* set the area that must be redisplayed */ 2646 buf->b_mod_set = TRUE; 2647 buf->b_mod_top = lnum; 2648 buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra; 2649 buf->b_mod_xlines = xtra; 2650 } 2651 } 2652 2653 static void 2654 changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra) 2655 linenr_T lnum; 2656 colnr_T col; 2657 linenr_T lnume; 2658 long xtra; 2659 { 2660 win_T *wp; 2661 int i; 2662 #ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST 2663 int cols; 2664 pos_T *p; 2665 int add; 2666 #endif 2667 2668 /* mark the buffer as modified */ 2669 changed(); 2670 2671 /* set the '. mark */ 2672 if (!cmdmod.keepjumps) 2673 { 2674 curbuf->b_last_change.lnum = lnum; 2675 curbuf->b_last_change.col = col; 2676 2677 #ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST 2678 /* Create a new entry if a new undo-able change was started or we 2679 * don't have an entry yet. */ 2680 if (curbuf->b_new_change || curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0) 2681 { 2682 if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0) 2683 add = TRUE; 2684 else 2685 { 2686 /* Don't create a new entry when the line number is the same 2687 * as the last one and the column is not too far away. Avoids 2688 * creating many entries for typing "xxxxx". */ 2689 p = &curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1]; 2690 if (p->lnum != lnum) 2691 add = TRUE; 2692 else 2693 { 2694 cols = comp_textwidth(FALSE); 2695 if (cols == 0) 2696 cols = 79; 2697 add = (p->col + cols < col || col + cols < p->col); 2698 } 2699 } 2700 if (add) 2701 { 2702 /* This is the first of a new sequence of undo-able changes 2703 * and it's at some distance of the last change. Use a new 2704 * position in the changelist. */ 2705 curbuf->b_new_change = FALSE; 2706 2707 if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == JUMPLISTSIZE) 2708 { 2709 /* changelist is full: remove oldest entry */ 2710 curbuf->b_changelistlen = JUMPLISTSIZE - 1; 2711 mch_memmove(curbuf->b_changelist, curbuf->b_changelist + 1, 2712 sizeof(pos_T) * (JUMPLISTSIZE - 1)); 2713 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp) 2714 { 2715 /* Correct position in changelist for other windows on 2716 * this buffer. */ 2717 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf && wp->w_changelistidx > 0) 2718 --wp->w_changelistidx; 2719 } 2720 } 2721 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp) 2722 { 2723 /* For other windows, if the position in the changelist is 2724 * at the end it stays at the end. */ 2725 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf 2726 && wp->w_changelistidx == curbuf->b_changelistlen) 2727 ++wp->w_changelistidx; 2728 } 2729 ++curbuf->b_changelistlen; 2730 } 2731 } 2732 curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1] = 2733 curbuf->b_last_change; 2734 /* The current window is always after the last change, so that "g," 2735 * takes you back to it. */ 2736 curwin->w_changelistidx = curbuf->b_changelistlen; 2737 #endif 2738 } 2739 2740 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp) 2741 { 2742 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf) 2743 { 2744 /* Mark this window to be redrawn later. */ 2745 if (wp->w_redr_type < VALID) 2746 wp->w_redr_type = VALID; 2747 2748 /* Check if a change in the buffer has invalidated the cached 2749 * values for the cursor. */ 2750 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING 2751 /* 2752 * Update the folds for this window. Can't postpone this, because 2753 * a following operator might work on the whole fold: ">>dd". 2754 */ 2755 foldUpdate(wp, lnum, lnume + xtra - 1); 2756 2757 /* The change may cause lines above or below the change to become 2758 * included in a fold. Set lnum/lnume to the first/last line that 2759 * might be displayed differently. 2760 * Set w_cline_folded here as an efficient way to update it when 2761 * inserting lines just above a closed fold. */ 2762 i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnum, &lnum, NULL, FALSE, NULL); 2763 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum) 2764 wp->w_cline_folded = i; 2765 i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnume, NULL, &lnume, FALSE, NULL); 2766 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnume) 2767 wp->w_cline_folded = i; 2768 2769 /* If the changed line is in a range of previously folded lines, 2770 * compare with the first line in that range. */ 2771 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum <= lnum) 2772 { 2773 i = find_wl_entry(wp, lnum); 2774 if (i >= 0 && wp->w_cursor.lnum > wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum) 2775 changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp); 2776 } 2777 #endif 2778 2779 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum > lnum) 2780 changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp); 2781 else if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum && wp->w_cursor.col >= col) 2782 changed_cline_bef_curs_win(wp); 2783 if (wp->w_botline >= lnum) 2784 { 2785 /* Assume that botline doesn't change (inserted lines make 2786 * other lines scroll down below botline). */ 2787 approximate_botline_win(wp); 2788 } 2789 2790 /* Check if any w_lines[] entries have become invalid. 2791 * For entries below the change: Correct the lnums for 2792 * inserted/deleted lines. Makes it possible to stop displaying 2793 * after the change. */ 2794 for (i = 0; i < wp->w_lines_valid; ++i) 2795 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid) 2796 { 2797 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum >= lnum) 2798 { 2799 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum < lnume) 2800 { 2801 /* line included in change */ 2802 wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE; 2803 } 2804 else if (xtra != 0) 2805 { 2806 /* line below change */ 2807 wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum += xtra; 2808 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING 2809 wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum += xtra; 2810 #endif 2811 } 2812 } 2813 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING 2814 else if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum >= lnum) 2815 { 2816 /* change somewhere inside this range of folded lines, 2817 * may need to be redrawn */ 2818 wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE; 2819 } 2820 #endif 2821 } 2822 } 2823 } 2824 2825 /* Call update_screen() later, which checks out what needs to be redrawn, 2826 * since it notices b_mod_set and then uses b_mod_*. */ 2827 if (must_redraw < VALID) 2828 must_redraw = VALID; 2829 } 2830 2831 /* 2832 * unchanged() is called when the changed flag must be reset for buffer 'buf' 2833 */ 2834 void 2835 unchanged(buf, ff) 2836 buf_T *buf; 2837 int ff; /* also reset 'fileformat' */ 2838 { 2839 if (buf->b_changed || (ff && file_ff_differs(buf))) 2840 { 2841 buf->b_changed = 0; 2842 ml_setflags(buf); 2843 if (ff) 2844 save_file_ff(buf); 2845 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS 2846 check_status(buf); 2847 #endif 2848 #ifdef FEAT_TITLE 2849 need_maketitle = TRUE; /* set window title later */ 2850 #endif 2851 } 2852 ++buf->b_changedtick; 2853 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG 2854 netbeans_unmodified(buf); 2855 #endif 2856 } 2857 2858 #if defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) || defined(PROTO) 2859 /* 2860 * check_status: called when the status bars for the buffer 'buf' 2861 * need to be updated 2862 */ 2863 void 2864 check_status(buf) 2865 buf_T *buf; 2866 { 2867 win_T *wp; 2868 2869 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next) 2870 if (wp->w_buffer == buf && wp->w_status_height) 2871 { 2872 wp->w_redr_status = TRUE; 2873 if (must_redraw < VALID) 2874 must_redraw = VALID; 2875 } 2876 } 2877 #endif 2878 2879 /* 2880 * If the file is readonly, give a warning message with the first change. 2881 * Don't do this for autocommands. 2882 * Don't use emsg(), because it flushes the macro buffer. 2883 * If we have undone all changes b_changed will be FALSE, but "b_did_warn" 2884 * will be TRUE. 2885 */ 2886 void 2887 change_warning(col) 2888 int col; /* column for message; non-zero when in insert 2889 mode and 'showmode' is on */ 2890 { 2891 if (curbuf->b_did_warn == FALSE 2892 && curbufIsChanged() == 0 2893 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD 2894 && !autocmd_busy 2895 #endif 2896 && curbuf->b_p_ro) 2897 { 2898 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD 2899 apply_autocmds(EVENT_FILECHANGEDRO, NULL, NULL, FALSE, curbuf); 2900 if (!curbuf->b_p_ro) 2901 return; 2902 #endif 2903 /* 2904 * Do what msg() does, but with a column offset if the warning should 2905 * be after the mode message. 2906 */ 2907 msg_start(); 2908 if (msg_row == Rows - 1) 2909 msg_col = col; 2910 msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W)); 2911 MSG_PUTS_ATTR(_("W10: Warning: Changing a readonly file"), 2912 hl_attr(HLF_W) | MSG_HIST); 2913 msg_clr_eos(); 2914 (void)msg_end(); 2915 if (msg_silent == 0 && !silent_mode) 2916 { 2917 out_flush(); 2918 ui_delay(1000L, TRUE); /* give the user time to think about it */ 2919 } 2920 curbuf->b_did_warn = TRUE; 2921 redraw_cmdline = FALSE; /* don't redraw and erase the message */ 2922 if (msg_row < Rows - 1) 2923 showmode(); 2924 } 2925 } 2926 2927 /* 2928 * Ask for a reply from the user, a 'y' or a 'n'. 2929 * No other characters are accepted, the message is repeated until a valid 2930 * reply is entered or CTRL-C is hit. 2931 * If direct is TRUE, don't use vgetc() but ui_inchar(), don't get characters 2932 * from any buffers but directly from the user. 2933 * 2934 * return the 'y' or 'n' 2935 */ 2936 int 2937 ask_yesno(str, direct) 2938 char_u *str; 2939 int direct; 2940 { 2941 int r = ' '; 2942 int save_State = State; 2943 2944 if (exiting) /* put terminal in raw mode for this question */ 2945 settmode(TMODE_RAW); 2946 ++no_wait_return; 2947 #ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL 2948 dont_scroll = TRUE; /* disallow scrolling here */ 2949 #endif 2950 State = CONFIRM; /* mouse behaves like with :confirm */ 2951 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE 2952 setmouse(); /* disables mouse for xterm */ 2953 #endif 2954 ++no_mapping; 2955 ++allow_keys; /* no mapping here, but recognize keys */ 2956 2957 while (r != 'y' && r != 'n') 2958 { 2959 /* same highlighting as for wait_return */ 2960 smsg_attr(hl_attr(HLF_R), (char_u *)"%s (y/n)?", str); 2961 if (direct) 2962 r = get_keystroke(); 2963 else 2964 r = safe_vgetc(); 2965 if (r == Ctrl_C || r == ESC) 2966 r = 'n'; 2967 msg_putchar(r); /* show what you typed */ 2968 out_flush(); 2969 } 2970 --no_wait_return; 2971 State = save_State; 2972 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE 2973 setmouse(); 2974 #endif 2975 --no_mapping; 2976 --allow_keys; 2977 2978 return r; 2979 } 2980 2981 /* 2982 * Get a key stroke directly from the user. 2983 * Ignores mouse clicks and scrollbar events, except a click for the left 2984 * button (used at the more prompt). 2985 * Doesn't use vgetc(), because it syncs undo and eats mapped characters. 2986 * Disadvantage: typeahead is ignored. 2987 * Translates the interrupt character for unix to ESC. 2988 */ 2989 int 2990 get_keystroke() 2991 { 2992 #define CBUFLEN 151 2993 char_u buf[CBUFLEN]; 2994 int len = 0; 2995 int n; 2996 int save_mapped_ctrl_c = mapped_ctrl_c; 2997 2998 mapped_ctrl_c = FALSE; /* mappings are not used here */ 2999 for (;;) 3000 { 3001 cursor_on(); 3002 out_flush(); 3003 3004 /* First time: blocking wait. Second time: wait up to 100ms for a 3005 * terminal code to complete. Leave some room for check_termcode() to 3006 * insert a key code into (max 5 chars plus NUL). And 3007 * fix_input_buffer() can triple the number of bytes. */ 3008 n = ui_inchar(buf + len, (CBUFLEN - 6 - len) / 3, 3009 len == 0 ? -1L : 100L, 0); 3010 if (n > 0) 3011 { 3012 /* Replace zero and CSI by a special key code. */ 3013 n = fix_input_buffer(buf + len, n, FALSE); 3014 len += n; 3015 } 3016 3017 /* incomplete termcode: get more characters */ 3018 if ((n = check_termcode(1, buf, len)) < 0) 3019 continue; 3020 /* found a termcode: adjust length */ 3021 if (n > 0) 3022 len = n; 3023 if (len == 0) /* nothing typed yet */ 3024 continue; 3025 3026 /* Handle modifier and/or special key code. */ 3027 n = buf[0]; 3028 if (n == K_SPECIAL) 3029 { 3030 n = TO_SPECIAL(buf[1], buf[2]); 3031 if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER 3032 || n == K_IGNORE 3033 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE 3034 || n == K_LEFTMOUSE_NM 3035 || n == K_LEFTDRAG 3036 || n == K_LEFTRELEASE 3037 || n == K_LEFTRELEASE_NM 3038 || n == K_MIDDLEMOUSE 3039 || n == K_MIDDLEDRAG 3040 || n == K_MIDDLERELEASE 3041 || n == K_RIGHTMOUSE 3042 || n == K_RIGHTDRAG 3043 || n == K_RIGHTRELEASE 3044 || n == K_MOUSEDOWN 3045 || n == K_MOUSEUP 3046 || n == K_X1MOUSE 3047 || n == K_X1DRAG 3048 || n == K_X1RELEASE 3049 || n == K_X2MOUSE 3050 || n == K_X2DRAG 3051 || n == K_X2RELEASE 3052 # ifdef FEAT_GUI 3053 || n == K_VER_SCROLLBAR 3054 || n == K_HOR_SCROLLBAR 3055 # endif 3056 #endif 3057 ) 3058 { 3059 if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER) 3060 mod_mask = buf[2]; 3061 len -= 3; 3062 if (len > 0) 3063 mch_memmove(buf, buf + 3, (size_t)len); 3064 continue; 3065 } 3066 } 3067 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 3068 if (has_mbyte) 3069 { 3070 if (MB_BYTE2LEN(n) > len) 3071 continue; /* more bytes to get */ 3072 buf[len >= CBUFLEN ? CBUFLEN - 1 : len] = NUL; 3073 n = (*mb_ptr2char)(buf); 3074 } 3075 #endif 3076 #ifdef UNIX 3077 if (n == intr_char) 3078 n = ESC; 3079 #endif 3080 break; 3081 } 3082 3083 mapped_ctrl_c = save_mapped_ctrl_c; 3084 return n; 3085 } 3086 3087 /* 3088 * Get a number from the user. 3089 * When "mouse_used" is not NULL allow using the mouse. 3090 */ 3091 int 3092 get_number(colon, mouse_used) 3093 int colon; /* allow colon to abort */ 3094 int *mouse_used; 3095 { 3096 int n = 0; 3097 int c; 3098 3099 if (mouse_used != NULL) 3100 *mouse_used = FALSE; 3101 3102 /* When not printing messages, the user won't know what to type, return a 3103 * zero (as if CR was hit). */ 3104 if (msg_silent != 0) 3105 return 0; 3106 3107 #ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL 3108 dont_scroll = TRUE; /* disallow scrolling here */ 3109 #endif 3110 ++no_mapping; 3111 ++allow_keys; /* no mapping here, but recognize keys */ 3112 for (;;) 3113 { 3114 windgoto(msg_row, msg_col); 3115 c = safe_vgetc(); 3116 if (VIM_ISDIGIT(c)) 3117 { 3118 n = n * 10 + c - '0'; 3119 msg_putchar(c); 3120 } 3121 else if (c == K_DEL || c == K_KDEL || c == K_BS || c == Ctrl_H) 3122 { 3123 n /= 10; 3124 MSG_PUTS("\b \b"); 3125 } 3126 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE 3127 else if (mouse_used != NULL && c == K_LEFTMOUSE) 3128 { 3129 *mouse_used = TRUE; 3130 n = mouse_row + 1; 3131 break; 3132 } 3133 #endif 3134 else if (n == 0 && c == ':' && colon) 3135 { 3136 stuffcharReadbuff(':'); 3137 if (!exmode_active) 3138 cmdline_row = msg_row; 3139 skip_redraw = TRUE; /* skip redraw once */ 3140 do_redraw = FALSE; 3141 break; 3142 } 3143 else if (c == CAR || c == NL || c == Ctrl_C || c == ESC) 3144 break; 3145 } 3146 --no_mapping; 3147 --allow_keys; 3148 return n; 3149 } 3150 3151 /* 3152 * Ask the user to enter a number. 3153 * When "mouse_used" is not NULL allow using the mouse and in that case return 3154 * the line number. 3155 */ 3156 int 3157 prompt_for_number(mouse_used) 3158 int *mouse_used; 3159 { 3160 int i; 3161 int save_cmdline_row; 3162 int save_State; 3163 3164 /* When using ":silent" assume that <CR> was entered. */ 3165 if (mouse_used != NULL) 3166 MSG_PUTS(_("Type number or click with mouse (<Enter> cancels): ")); 3167 else 3168 MSG_PUTS(_("Choice number (<Enter> cancels): ")); 3169 3170 /* Set the state such that text can be selected/copied/pasted. */ 3171 save_cmdline_row = cmdline_row; 3172 cmdline_row = Rows - 1; 3173 save_State = State; 3174 if (mouse_used == NULL) 3175 State = CMDLINE; 3176 else 3177 State = NORMAL; 3178 3179 i = get_number(TRUE, mouse_used); 3180 if (KeyTyped) 3181 { 3182 /* don't call wait_return() now */ 3183 /* msg_putchar('\n'); */ 3184 cmdline_row = msg_row - 1; 3185 need_wait_return = FALSE; 3186 msg_didany = FALSE; 3187 } 3188 else 3189 cmdline_row = save_cmdline_row; 3190 State = save_State; 3191 3192 return i; 3193 } 3194 3195 void 3196 msgmore(n) 3197 long n; 3198 { 3199 long pn; 3200 3201 if (global_busy /* no messages now, wait until global is finished */ 3202 || !messaging()) /* 'lazyredraw' set, don't do messages now */ 3203 return; 3204 3205 /* We don't want to overwrite another important message, but do overwrite 3206 * a previous "more lines" or "fewer lines" message, so that "5dd" and 3207 * then "put" reports the last action. */ 3208 if (keep_msg != NULL && !keep_msg_more) 3209 return; 3210 3211 if (n > 0) 3212 pn = n; 3213 else 3214 pn = -n; 3215 3216 if (pn > p_report) 3217 { 3218 if (pn == 1) 3219 { 3220 if (n > 0) 3221 STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 more line")); 3222 else 3223 STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 line less")); 3224 } 3225 else 3226 { 3227 if (n > 0) 3228 sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld more lines"), pn); 3229 else 3230 sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld fewer lines"), pn); 3231 } 3232 if (got_int) 3233 STRCAT(msg_buf, _(" (Interrupted)")); 3234 if (msg(msg_buf)) 3235 { 3236 set_keep_msg(msg_buf); 3237 keep_msg_attr = 0; 3238 keep_msg_more = TRUE; 3239 } 3240 } 3241 } 3242 3243 /* 3244 * flush map and typeahead buffers and give a warning for an error 3245 */ 3246 void 3247 beep_flush() 3248 { 3249 if (emsg_silent == 0) 3250 { 3251 flush_buffers(FALSE); 3252 vim_beep(); 3253 } 3254 } 3255 3256 /* 3257 * give a warning for an error 3258 */ 3259 void 3260 vim_beep() 3261 { 3262 if (emsg_silent == 0) 3263 { 3264 if (p_vb 3265 #ifdef FEAT_GUI 3266 /* While the GUI is starting up the termcap is set for the GUI 3267 * but the output still goes to a terminal. */ 3268 && !(gui.in_use && gui.starting) 3269 #endif 3270 ) 3271 { 3272 out_str(T_VB); 3273 } 3274 else 3275 { 3276 #ifdef MSDOS 3277 /* 3278 * The number of beeps outputted is reduced to avoid having to wait 3279 * for all the beeps to finish. This is only a problem on systems 3280 * where the beeps don't overlap. 3281 */ 3282 if (beep_count == 0 || beep_count == 10) 3283 { 3284 out_char(BELL); 3285 beep_count = 1; 3286 } 3287 else 3288 ++beep_count; 3289 #else 3290 out_char(BELL); 3291 #endif 3292 } 3293 3294 /* When 'verbose' is set and we are sourcing a script or executing a 3295 * function give the user a hint where the beep comes from. */ 3296 if (vim_strchr(p_debug, 'e') != NULL) 3297 { 3298 msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W)); 3299 msg_attr((char_u *)_("Beep!"), hl_attr(HLF_W)); 3300 } 3301 } 3302 } 3303 3304 /* 3305 * To get the "real" home directory: 3306 * - get value of $HOME 3307 * For Unix: 3308 * - go to that directory 3309 * - do mch_dirname() to get the real name of that directory. 3310 * This also works with mounts and links. 3311 * Don't do this for MS-DOS, it will change the "current dir" for a drive. 3312 */ 3313 static char_u *homedir = NULL; 3314 3315 void 3316 init_homedir() 3317 { 3318 char_u *var; 3319 3320 /* In case we are called a second time (when 'encoding' changes). */ 3321 vim_free(homedir); 3322 homedir = NULL; 3323 3324 #ifdef VMS 3325 var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN"); 3326 #else 3327 var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME"); 3328 #endif 3329 3330 if (var != NULL && *var == NUL) /* empty is same as not set */ 3331 var = NULL; 3332 3333 #ifdef WIN3264 3334 /* 3335 * Weird but true: $HOME may contain an indirect reference to another 3336 * variable, esp. "%USERPROFILE%". Happens when $USERPROFILE isn't set 3337 * when $HOME is being set. 3338 */ 3339 if (var != NULL && *var == '%') 3340 { 3341 char_u *p; 3342 char_u *exp; 3343 3344 p = vim_strchr(var + 1, '%'); 3345 if (p != NULL) 3346 { 3347 vim_strncpy(NameBuff, var + 1, p - (var + 1)); 3348 exp = mch_getenv(NameBuff); 3349 if (exp != NULL && *exp != NUL 3350 && STRLEN(exp) + STRLEN(p) < MAXPATHL) 3351 { 3352 vim_snprintf((char *)NameBuff, MAXPATHL, "%s%s", exp, p + 1); 3353 var = NameBuff; 3354 /* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */ 3355 vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff); 3356 } 3357 } 3358 } 3359 3360 /* 3361 * Typically, $HOME is not defined on Windows, unless the user has 3362 * specifically defined it for Vim's sake. However, on Windows NT 3363 * platforms, $HOMEDRIVE and $HOMEPATH are automatically defined for 3364 * each user. Try constructing $HOME from these. 3365 */ 3366 if (var == NULL) 3367 { 3368 char_u *homedrive, *homepath; 3369 3370 homedrive = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEDRIVE"); 3371 homepath = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEPATH"); 3372 if (homedrive != NULL && homepath != NULL 3373 && STRLEN(homedrive) + STRLEN(homepath) < MAXPATHL) 3374 { 3375 sprintf((char *)NameBuff, "%s%s", homedrive, homepath); 3376 if (NameBuff[0] != NUL) 3377 { 3378 var = NameBuff; 3379 /* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */ 3380 vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff); 3381 } 3382 } 3383 } 3384 3385 # if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) 3386 if (enc_utf8 && var != NULL) 3387 { 3388 int len; 3389 char_u *pp; 3390 3391 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions are 3392 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */ 3393 acp_to_enc(var, STRLEN(var), &pp, &len); 3394 if (pp != NULL) 3395 { 3396 homedir = pp; 3397 return; 3398 } 3399 } 3400 # endif 3401 #endif 3402 3403 #if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) 3404 /* 3405 * Default home dir is C:/ 3406 * Best assumption we can make in such a situation. 3407 */ 3408 if (var == NULL) 3409 var = "C:/"; 3410 #endif 3411 if (var != NULL) 3412 { 3413 #ifdef UNIX 3414 /* 3415 * Change to the directory and get the actual path. This resolves 3416 * links. Don't do it when we can't return. 3417 */ 3418 if (mch_dirname(NameBuff, MAXPATHL) == OK 3419 && mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) == 0) 3420 { 3421 if (!mch_chdir((char *)var) && mch_dirname(IObuff, IOSIZE) == OK) 3422 var = IObuff; 3423 if (mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) != 0) 3424 EMSG(_(e_prev_dir)); 3425 } 3426 #endif 3427 homedir = vim_strsave(var); 3428 } 3429 } 3430 3431 #if defined(EXITFREE) || defined(PROTO) 3432 void 3433 free_homedir() 3434 { 3435 vim_free(homedir); 3436 } 3437 #endif 3438 3439 /* 3440 * Expand environment variable with path name. 3441 * "~/" is also expanded, using $HOME. For Unix "~user/" is expanded. 3442 * Skips over "\ ", "\~" and "\$". 3443 * If anything fails no expansion is done and dst equals src. 3444 */ 3445 void 3446 expand_env(src, dst, dstlen) 3447 char_u *src; /* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */ 3448 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */ 3449 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */ 3450 { 3451 expand_env_esc(src, dst, dstlen, FALSE, NULL); 3452 } 3453 3454 void 3455 expand_env_esc(srcp, dst, dstlen, esc, startstr) 3456 char_u *srcp; /* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */ 3457 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */ 3458 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */ 3459 int esc; /* escape spaces in expanded variables */ 3460 char_u *startstr; /* start again after this (can be NULL) */ 3461 { 3462 char_u *src; 3463 char_u *tail; 3464 int c; 3465 char_u *var; 3466 int copy_char; 3467 int mustfree; /* var was allocated, need to free it later */ 3468 int at_start = TRUE; /* at start of a name */ 3469 int startstr_len = 0; 3470 3471 if (startstr != NULL) 3472 startstr_len = STRLEN(startstr); 3473 3474 src = skipwhite(srcp); 3475 --dstlen; /* leave one char space for "\," */ 3476 while (*src && dstlen > 0) 3477 { 3478 copy_char = TRUE; 3479 if ((*src == '$' 3480 #ifdef VMS 3481 && at_start 3482 #endif 3483 ) 3484 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) 3485 || *src == '%' 3486 #endif 3487 || (*src == '~' && at_start)) 3488 { 3489 mustfree = FALSE; 3490 3491 /* 3492 * The variable name is copied into dst temporarily, because it may 3493 * be a string in read-only memory and a NUL needs to be appended. 3494 */ 3495 if (*src != '~') /* environment var */ 3496 { 3497 tail = src + 1; 3498 var = dst; 3499 c = dstlen - 1; 3500 3501 #ifdef UNIX 3502 /* Unix has ${var-name} type environment vars */ 3503 if (*tail == '{' && !vim_isIDc('{')) 3504 { 3505 tail++; /* ignore '{' */ 3506 while (c-- > 0 && *tail && *tail != '}') 3507 *var++ = *tail++; 3508 } 3509 else 3510 #endif 3511 { 3512 while (c-- > 0 && *tail != NUL && ((vim_isIDc(*tail)) 3513 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) 3514 || (*src == '%' && *tail != '%') 3515 #endif 3516 )) 3517 { 3518 #ifdef OS2 /* env vars only in uppercase */ 3519 *var++ = TOUPPER_LOC(*tail); 3520 tail++; /* toupper() may be a macro! */ 3521 #else 3522 *var++ = *tail++; 3523 #endif 3524 } 3525 } 3526 3527 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX) 3528 # ifdef UNIX 3529 if (src[1] == '{' && *tail != '}') 3530 # else 3531 if (*src == '%' && *tail != '%') 3532 # endif 3533 var = NULL; 3534 else 3535 { 3536 # ifdef UNIX 3537 if (src[1] == '{') 3538 # else 3539 if (*src == '%') 3540 #endif 3541 ++tail; 3542 #endif 3543 *var = NUL; 3544 var = vim_getenv(dst, &mustfree); 3545 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX) 3546 } 3547 #endif 3548 } 3549 /* home directory */ 3550 else if ( src[1] == NUL 3551 || vim_ispathsep(src[1]) 3552 || vim_strchr((char_u *)" ,\t\n", src[1]) != NULL) 3553 { 3554 var = homedir; 3555 tail = src + 1; 3556 } 3557 else /* user directory */ 3558 { 3559 #if defined(UNIX) || (defined(VMS) && defined(USER_HOME)) 3560 /* 3561 * Copy ~user to dst[], so we can put a NUL after it. 3562 */ 3563 tail = src; 3564 var = dst; 3565 c = dstlen - 1; 3566 while ( c-- > 0 3567 && *tail 3568 && vim_isfilec(*tail) 3569 && !vim_ispathsep(*tail)) 3570 *var++ = *tail++; 3571 *var = NUL; 3572 # ifdef UNIX 3573 /* 3574 * If the system supports getpwnam(), use it. 3575 * Otherwise, or if getpwnam() fails, the shell is used to 3576 * expand ~user. This is slower and may fail if the shell 3577 * does not support ~user (old versions of /bin/sh). 3578 */ 3579 # if defined(HAVE_GETPWNAM) && defined(HAVE_PWD_H) 3580 { 3581 struct passwd *pw; 3582 3583 pw = getpwnam((char *)dst + 1); 3584 if (pw != NULL) 3585 var = (char_u *)pw->pw_dir; 3586 else 3587 var = NULL; 3588 } 3589 if (var == NULL) 3590 # endif 3591 { 3592 expand_T xpc; 3593 3594 ExpandInit(&xpc); 3595 xpc.xp_context = EXPAND_FILES; 3596 var = ExpandOne(&xpc, dst, NULL, 3597 WILD_ADD_SLASH|WILD_SILENT, WILD_EXPAND_FREE); 3598 ExpandCleanup(&xpc); 3599 mustfree = TRUE; 3600 } 3601 3602 # else /* !UNIX, thus VMS */ 3603 /* 3604 * USER_HOME is a comma-separated list of 3605 * directories to search for the user account in. 3606 */ 3607 { 3608 char_u test[MAXPATHL], paths[MAXPATHL]; 3609 char_u *path, *next_path, *ptr; 3610 struct stat st; 3611 3612 STRCPY(paths, USER_HOME); 3613 next_path = paths; 3614 while (*next_path) 3615 { 3616 for (path = next_path; *next_path && *next_path != ','; 3617 next_path++); 3618 if (*next_path) 3619 *next_path++ = NUL; 3620 STRCPY(test, path); 3621 STRCAT(test, "/"); 3622 STRCAT(test, dst + 1); 3623 if (mch_stat(test, &st) == 0) 3624 { 3625 var = alloc(STRLEN(test) + 1); 3626 STRCPY(var, test); 3627 mustfree = TRUE; 3628 break; 3629 } 3630 } 3631 } 3632 # endif /* UNIX */ 3633 #else 3634 /* cannot expand user's home directory, so don't try */ 3635 var = NULL; 3636 tail = (char_u *)""; /* for gcc */ 3637 #endif /* UNIX || VMS */ 3638 } 3639 3640 #ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME 3641 /* If 'shellslash' is set change backslashes to forward slashes. 3642 * Can't use slash_adjust(), p_ssl may be set temporarily. */ 3643 if (p_ssl && var != NULL && vim_strchr(var, '\\') != NULL) 3644 { 3645 char_u *p = vim_strsave(var); 3646 3647 if (p != NULL) 3648 { 3649 if (mustfree) 3650 vim_free(var); 3651 var = p; 3652 mustfree = TRUE; 3653 forward_slash(var); 3654 } 3655 } 3656 #endif 3657 3658 /* If "var" contains white space, escape it with a backslash. 3659 * Required for ":e ~/tt" when $HOME includes a space. */ 3660 if (esc && var != NULL && vim_strpbrk(var, (char_u *)" \t") != NULL) 3661 { 3662 char_u *p = vim_strsave_escaped(var, (char_u *)" \t"); 3663 3664 if (p != NULL) 3665 { 3666 if (mustfree) 3667 vim_free(var); 3668 var = p; 3669 mustfree = TRUE; 3670 } 3671 } 3672 3673 if (var != NULL && *var != NUL 3674 && (STRLEN(var) + STRLEN(tail) + 1 < (unsigned)dstlen)) 3675 { 3676 STRCPY(dst, var); 3677 dstlen -= (int)STRLEN(var); 3678 c = STRLEN(var); 3679 /* if var[] ends in a path separator and tail[] starts 3680 * with it, skip a character */ 3681 if (*var != NUL && after_pathsep(dst, dst + c) 3682 #if defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME) || defined(AMIGA) 3683 && dst[-1] != ':' 3684 #endif 3685 && vim_ispathsep(*tail)) 3686 ++tail; 3687 dst += c; 3688 src = tail; 3689 copy_char = FALSE; 3690 } 3691 if (mustfree) 3692 vim_free(var); 3693 } 3694 3695 if (copy_char) /* copy at least one char */ 3696 { 3697 /* 3698 * Recogize the start of a new name, for '~'. 3699 */ 3700 at_start = FALSE; 3701 if (src[0] == '\\' && src[1] != NUL) 3702 { 3703 *dst++ = *src++; 3704 --dstlen; 3705 } 3706 else if (src[0] == ' ' || src[0] == ',') 3707 at_start = TRUE; 3708 *dst++ = *src++; 3709 --dstlen; 3710 3711 if (startstr != NULL && src - startstr_len >= srcp 3712 && STRNCMP(src - startstr_len, startstr, startstr_len) == 0) 3713 at_start = TRUE; 3714 } 3715 } 3716 *dst = NUL; 3717 } 3718 3719 /* 3720 * Vim's version of getenv(). 3721 * Special handling of $HOME, $VIM and $VIMRUNTIME. 3722 * Also does ACP to 'enc' conversion for Win32. 3723 */ 3724 char_u * 3725 vim_getenv(name, mustfree) 3726 char_u *name; 3727 int *mustfree; /* set to TRUE when returned is allocated */ 3728 { 3729 char_u *p; 3730 char_u *pend; 3731 int vimruntime; 3732 3733 #if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) 3734 /* use "C:/" when $HOME is not set */ 3735 if (STRCMP(name, "HOME") == 0) 3736 return homedir; 3737 #endif 3738 3739 p = mch_getenv(name); 3740 if (p != NULL && *p == NUL) /* empty is the same as not set */ 3741 p = NULL; 3742 3743 if (p != NULL) 3744 { 3745 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264) 3746 if (enc_utf8) 3747 { 3748 int len; 3749 char_u *pp; 3750 3751 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions are 3752 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */ 3753 acp_to_enc(p, STRLEN(p), &pp, &len); 3754 if (pp != NULL) 3755 { 3756 p = pp; 3757 *mustfree = TRUE; 3758 } 3759 } 3760 #endif 3761 return p; 3762 } 3763 3764 vimruntime = (STRCMP(name, "VIMRUNTIME") == 0); 3765 if (!vimruntime && STRCMP(name, "VIM") != 0) 3766 return NULL; 3767 3768 /* 3769 * When expanding $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using $VIM/vim<version> or $VIM. 3770 * Don't do this when default_vimruntime_dir is non-empty. 3771 */ 3772 if (vimruntime 3773 #ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF 3774 && *default_vimruntime_dir == NUL 3775 #endif 3776 ) 3777 { 3778 p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM"); 3779 if (p != NULL && *p == NUL) /* empty is the same as not set */ 3780 p = NULL; 3781 if (p != NULL) 3782 { 3783 p = vim_version_dir(p); 3784 if (p != NULL) 3785 *mustfree = TRUE; 3786 else 3787 p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM"); 3788 3789 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264) 3790 if (enc_utf8) 3791 { 3792 int len; 3793 char_u *pp; 3794 3795 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions 3796 * are not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII 3797 * characters. */ 3798 acp_to_enc(p, STRLEN(p), &pp, &len); 3799 if (pp != NULL) 3800 { 3801 if (mustfree) 3802 vim_free(p); 3803 p = pp; 3804 *mustfree = TRUE; 3805 } 3806 } 3807 #endif 3808 } 3809 } 3810 3811 /* 3812 * When expanding $VIM or $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using: 3813 * - the directory name from 'helpfile' (unless it contains '$') 3814 * - the executable name from argv[0] 3815 */ 3816 if (p == NULL) 3817 { 3818 if (p_hf != NULL && vim_strchr(p_hf, '$') == NULL) 3819 p = p_hf; 3820 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME 3821 /* 3822 * Use the name of the executable, obtained from argv[0]. 3823 */ 3824 else 3825 p = exe_name; 3826 #endif 3827 if (p != NULL) 3828 { 3829 /* remove the file name */ 3830 pend = gettail(p); 3831 3832 /* remove "doc/" from 'helpfile', if present */ 3833 if (p == p_hf) 3834 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"doc"); 3835 3836 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME 3837 # ifdef MACOS_X 3838 /* remove "build/..." from exe_name, if present */ 3839 if (p == exe_name) 3840 { 3841 char_u *pend1; 3842 char_u *pend2; 3843 3844 pend1 = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"Contents/MacOS"); 3845 pend2 = remove_tail_with_ext(p, pend1, (char_u *)".app"); 3846 pend = remove_tail(p, pend2, (char_u *)"build"); 3847 /* When runnig from project builder get rid of the 3848 * build/???.app, otherwise keep the ???.app */ 3849 if (pend2 == pend) 3850 pend = pend1; 3851 } 3852 # endif 3853 /* remove "src/" from exe_name, if present */ 3854 if (p == exe_name) 3855 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"src"); 3856 #endif 3857 3858 /* for $VIM, remove "runtime/" or "vim54/", if present */ 3859 if (!vimruntime) 3860 { 3861 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME); 3862 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT); 3863 } 3864 3865 /* remove trailing path separator */ 3866 #ifndef MACOS_CLASSIC 3867 /* With MacOS path (with colons) the final colon is required */ 3868 /* to avoid confusion between absoulute and relative path */ 3869 if (pend > p && after_pathsep(p, pend)) 3870 --pend; 3871 #endif 3872 3873 /* check that the result is a directory name */ 3874 p = vim_strnsave(p, (int)(pend - p)); 3875 3876 if (p != NULL && !mch_isdir(p)) 3877 { 3878 vim_free(p); 3879 p = NULL; 3880 } 3881 else 3882 { 3883 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME 3884 /* may add "/vim54" or "/runtime" if it exists */ 3885 if (vimruntime && (pend = vim_version_dir(p)) != NULL) 3886 { 3887 vim_free(p); 3888 p = pend; 3889 } 3890 #endif 3891 *mustfree = TRUE; 3892 } 3893 } 3894 } 3895 3896 #ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF 3897 /* When there is a pathdef.c file we can use default_vim_dir and 3898 * default_vimruntime_dir */ 3899 if (p == NULL) 3900 { 3901 /* Only use default_vimruntime_dir when it is not empty */ 3902 if (vimruntime && *default_vimruntime_dir != NUL) 3903 { 3904 p = default_vimruntime_dir; 3905 *mustfree = FALSE; 3906 } 3907 else if (*default_vim_dir != NUL) 3908 { 3909 if (vimruntime && (p = vim_version_dir(default_vim_dir)) != NULL) 3910 *mustfree = TRUE; 3911 else 3912 { 3913 p = default_vim_dir; 3914 *mustfree = FALSE; 3915 } 3916 } 3917 } 3918 #endif 3919 3920 /* 3921 * Set the environment variable, so that the new value can be found fast 3922 * next time, and others can also use it (e.g. Perl). 3923 */ 3924 if (p != NULL) 3925 { 3926 if (vimruntime) 3927 { 3928 vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIMRUNTIME", p); 3929 didset_vimruntime = TRUE; 3930 #ifdef FEAT_GETTEXT 3931 { 3932 char_u *buf = concat_str(p, (char_u *)"/lang"); 3933 3934 if (buf != NULL) 3935 { 3936 bindtextdomain(VIMPACKAGE, (char *)buf); 3937 vim_free(buf); 3938 } 3939 } 3940 #endif 3941 } 3942 else 3943 { 3944 vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIM", p); 3945 didset_vim = TRUE; 3946 } 3947 } 3948 return p; 3949 } 3950 3951 /* 3952 * Check if the directory "vimdir/<version>" or "vimdir/runtime" exists. 3953 * Return NULL if not, return its name in allocated memory otherwise. 3954 */ 3955 static char_u * 3956 vim_version_dir(vimdir) 3957 char_u *vimdir; 3958 { 3959 char_u *p; 3960 3961 if (vimdir == NULL || *vimdir == NUL) 3962 return NULL; 3963 p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT, TRUE); 3964 if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p)) 3965 return p; 3966 vim_free(p); 3967 p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME, TRUE); 3968 if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p)) 3969 return p; 3970 vim_free(p); 3971 return NULL; 3972 } 3973 3974 /* 3975 * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "name/", return "pend" minus 3976 * the length of "name/". Otherwise return "pend". 3977 */ 3978 static char_u * 3979 remove_tail(p, pend, name) 3980 char_u *p; 3981 char_u *pend; 3982 char_u *name; 3983 { 3984 int len = (int)STRLEN(name) + 1; 3985 char_u *newend = pend - len; 3986 3987 if (newend >= p 3988 && fnamencmp(newend, name, len - 1) == 0 3989 && (newend == p || after_pathsep(p, newend))) 3990 return newend; 3991 return pend; 3992 } 3993 3994 #if defined(USE_EXE_NAME) && defined(MACOS_X) 3995 /* 3996 * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "???.ext/", return "pend" 3997 * minus the length of "???.ext/". Otherwise return "pend". 3998 */ 3999 static char_u * 4000 remove_tail_with_ext(p, pend, ext) 4001 char_u *p; 4002 char_u *pend; 4003 char_u *ext; 4004 { 4005 int len = (int)STRLEN(ext) + 1; 4006 char_u *newend = pend - len; 4007 4008 if (newend >= p && fnamencmp(newend, ext, len - 1) == 0) 4009 while (newend > p && !after_pathsep(p, newend)) 4010 mb_ptr_back(p, newend); 4011 if (newend == p || after_pathsep(p, newend)) 4012 return newend; 4013 return pend; 4014 } 4015 #endif 4016 4017 /* 4018 * Call expand_env() and store the result in an allocated string. 4019 * This is not very memory efficient, this expects the result to be freed 4020 * again soon. 4021 */ 4022 char_u * 4023 expand_env_save(src) 4024 char_u *src; 4025 { 4026 char_u *p; 4027 4028 p = alloc(MAXPATHL); 4029 if (p != NULL) 4030 expand_env(src, p, MAXPATHL); 4031 return p; 4032 } 4033 4034 /* 4035 * Our portable version of setenv. 4036 */ 4037 void 4038 vim_setenv(name, val) 4039 char_u *name; 4040 char_u *val; 4041 { 4042 #ifdef HAVE_SETENV 4043 mch_setenv((char *)name, (char *)val, 1); 4044 #else 4045 char_u *envbuf; 4046 4047 /* 4048 * Putenv does not copy the string, it has to remain 4049 * valid. The allocated memory will never be freed. 4050 */ 4051 envbuf = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(name) + STRLEN(val) + 2)); 4052 if (envbuf != NULL) 4053 { 4054 sprintf((char *)envbuf, "%s=%s", name, val); 4055 putenv((char *)envbuf); 4056 } 4057 #endif 4058 } 4059 4060 #if defined(FEAT_CMDL_COMPL) || defined(PROTO) 4061 /* 4062 * Function given to ExpandGeneric() to obtain an environment variable name. 4063 */ 4064 /*ARGSUSED*/ 4065 char_u * 4066 get_env_name(xp, idx) 4067 expand_T *xp; 4068 int idx; 4069 { 4070 # if defined(AMIGA) || defined(__MRC__) || defined(__SC__) 4071 /* 4072 * No environ[] on the Amiga and on the Mac (using MPW). 4073 */ 4074 return NULL; 4075 # else 4076 # ifndef __WIN32__ 4077 /* Borland C++ 5.2 has this in a header file. */ 4078 extern char **environ; 4079 # endif 4080 # define ENVNAMELEN 100 4081 static char_u name[ENVNAMELEN]; 4082 char_u *str; 4083 int n; 4084 4085 str = (char_u *)environ[idx]; 4086 if (str == NULL) 4087 return NULL; 4088 4089 for (n = 0; n < ENVNAMELEN - 1; ++n) 4090 { 4091 if (str[n] == '=' || str[n] == NUL) 4092 break; 4093 name[n] = str[n]; 4094 } 4095 name[n] = NUL; 4096 return name; 4097 # endif 4098 } 4099 #endif 4100 4101 /* 4102 * Replace home directory by "~" in each space or comma separated file name in 4103 * 'src'. 4104 * If anything fails (except when out of space) dst equals src. 4105 */ 4106 void 4107 home_replace(buf, src, dst, dstlen, one) 4108 buf_T *buf; /* when not NULL, check for help files */ 4109 char_u *src; /* input file name */ 4110 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */ 4111 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */ 4112 int one; /* if TRUE, only replace one file name, include 4113 spaces and commas in the file name. */ 4114 { 4115 size_t dirlen = 0, envlen = 0; 4116 size_t len; 4117 char_u *homedir_env; 4118 char_u *p; 4119 4120 if (src == NULL) 4121 { 4122 *dst = NUL; 4123 return; 4124 } 4125 4126 /* 4127 * If the file is a help file, remove the path completely. 4128 */ 4129 if (buf != NULL && buf->b_help) 4130 { 4131 STRCPY(dst, gettail(src)); 4132 return; 4133 } 4134 4135 /* 4136 * We check both the value of the $HOME environment variable and the 4137 * "real" home directory. 4138 */ 4139 if (homedir != NULL) 4140 dirlen = STRLEN(homedir); 4141 4142 #ifdef VMS 4143 homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN"); 4144 #else 4145 homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME"); 4146 #endif 4147 4148 if (homedir_env != NULL && *homedir_env == NUL) 4149 homedir_env = NULL; 4150 if (homedir_env != NULL) 4151 envlen = STRLEN(homedir_env); 4152 4153 if (!one) 4154 src = skipwhite(src); 4155 while (*src && dstlen > 0) 4156 { 4157 /* 4158 * Here we are at the beginning of a file name. 4159 * First, check to see if the beginning of the file name matches 4160 * $HOME or the "real" home directory. Check that there is a '/' 4161 * after the match (so that if e.g. the file is "/home/pieter/bla", 4162 * and the home directory is "/home/piet", the file does not end up 4163 * as "~er/bla" (which would seem to indicate the file "bla" in user 4164 * er's home directory)). 4165 */ 4166 p = homedir; 4167 len = dirlen; 4168 for (;;) 4169 { 4170 if ( len 4171 && fnamencmp(src, p, len) == 0 4172 && (vim_ispathsep(src[len]) 4173 || (!one && (src[len] == ',' || src[len] == ' ')) 4174 || src[len] == NUL)) 4175 { 4176 src += len; 4177 if (--dstlen > 0) 4178 *dst++ = '~'; 4179 4180 /* 4181 * If it's just the home directory, add "/". 4182 */ 4183 if (!vim_ispathsep(src[0]) && --dstlen > 0) 4184 *dst++ = '/'; 4185 break; 4186 } 4187 if (p == homedir_env) 4188 break; 4189 p = homedir_env; 4190 len = envlen; 4191 } 4192 4193 /* if (!one) skip to separator: space or comma */ 4194 while (*src && (one || (*src != ',' && *src != ' ')) && --dstlen > 0) 4195 *dst++ = *src++; 4196 /* skip separator */ 4197 while ((*src == ' ' || *src == ',') && --dstlen > 0) 4198 *dst++ = *src++; 4199 } 4200 /* if (dstlen == 0) out of space, what to do??? */ 4201 4202 *dst = NUL; 4203 } 4204 4205 /* 4206 * Like home_replace, store the replaced string in allocated memory. 4207 * When something fails, NULL is returned. 4208 */ 4209 char_u * 4210 home_replace_save(buf, src) 4211 buf_T *buf; /* when not NULL, check for help files */ 4212 char_u *src; /* input file name */ 4213 { 4214 char_u *dst; 4215 unsigned len; 4216 4217 len = 3; /* space for "~/" and trailing NUL */ 4218 if (src != NULL) /* just in case */ 4219 len += (unsigned)STRLEN(src); 4220 dst = alloc(len); 4221 if (dst != NULL) 4222 home_replace(buf, src, dst, len, TRUE); 4223 return dst; 4224 } 4225 4226 /* 4227 * Compare two file names and return: 4228 * FPC_SAME if they both exist and are the same file. 4229 * FPC_SAMEX if they both don't exist and have the same file name. 4230 * FPC_DIFF if they both exist and are different files. 4231 * FPC_NOTX if they both don't exist. 4232 * FPC_DIFFX if one of them doesn't exist. 4233 * For the first name environment variables are expanded 4234 */ 4235 int 4236 fullpathcmp(s1, s2, checkname) 4237 char_u *s1, *s2; 4238 int checkname; /* when both don't exist, check file names */ 4239 { 4240 #ifdef UNIX 4241 char_u exp1[MAXPATHL]; 4242 char_u full1[MAXPATHL]; 4243 char_u full2[MAXPATHL]; 4244 struct stat st1, st2; 4245 int r1, r2; 4246 4247 expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL); 4248 r1 = mch_stat((char *)exp1, &st1); 4249 r2 = mch_stat((char *)s2, &st2); 4250 if (r1 != 0 && r2 != 0) 4251 { 4252 /* if mch_stat() doesn't work, may compare the names */ 4253 if (checkname) 4254 { 4255 if (fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0) 4256 return FPC_SAMEX; 4257 r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE); 4258 r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE); 4259 if (r1 == OK && r2 == OK && fnamecmp(full1, full2) == 0) 4260 return FPC_SAMEX; 4261 } 4262 return FPC_NOTX; 4263 } 4264 if (r1 != 0 || r2 != 0) 4265 return FPC_DIFFX; 4266 if (st1.st_dev == st2.st_dev && st1.st_ino == st2.st_ino) 4267 return FPC_SAME; 4268 return FPC_DIFF; 4269 #else 4270 char_u *exp1; /* expanded s1 */ 4271 char_u *full1; /* full path of s1 */ 4272 char_u *full2; /* full path of s2 */ 4273 int retval = FPC_DIFF; 4274 int r1, r2; 4275 4276 /* allocate one buffer to store three paths (alloc()/free() is slow!) */ 4277 if ((exp1 = alloc(MAXPATHL * 3)) != NULL) 4278 { 4279 full1 = exp1 + MAXPATHL; 4280 full2 = full1 + MAXPATHL; 4281 4282 expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL); 4283 r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE); 4284 r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE); 4285 4286 /* If vim_FullName() fails, the file probably doesn't exist. */ 4287 if (r1 != OK && r2 != OK) 4288 { 4289 if (checkname && fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0) 4290 retval = FPC_SAMEX; 4291 else 4292 retval = FPC_NOTX; 4293 } 4294 else if (r1 != OK || r2 != OK) 4295 retval = FPC_DIFFX; 4296 else if (fnamecmp(full1, full2)) 4297 retval = FPC_DIFF; 4298 else 4299 retval = FPC_SAME; 4300 vim_free(exp1); 4301 } 4302 return retval; 4303 #endif 4304 } 4305 4306 /* 4307 * Get the tail of a path: the file name. 4308 * Fail safe: never returns NULL. 4309 */ 4310 char_u * 4311 gettail(fname) 4312 char_u *fname; 4313 { 4314 char_u *p1, *p2; 4315 4316 if (fname == NULL) 4317 return (char_u *)""; 4318 for (p1 = p2 = fname; *p2; ) /* find last part of path */ 4319 { 4320 if (vim_ispathsep(*p2)) 4321 p1 = p2 + 1; 4322 mb_ptr_adv(p2); 4323 } 4324 return p1; 4325 } 4326 4327 /* 4328 * Get pointer to tail of "fname", including path separators. Putting a NUL 4329 * here leaves the directory name. Takes care of "c:/" and "//". 4330 * Always returns a valid pointer. 4331 */ 4332 char_u * 4333 gettail_sep(fname) 4334 char_u *fname; 4335 { 4336 char_u *p; 4337 char_u *t; 4338 4339 p = get_past_head(fname); /* don't remove the '/' from "c:/file" */ 4340 t = gettail(fname); 4341 while (t > p && after_pathsep(fname, t)) 4342 --t; 4343 #ifdef VMS 4344 /* path separator is part of the path */ 4345 ++t; 4346 #endif 4347 return t; 4348 } 4349 4350 /* 4351 * get the next path component (just after the next path separator). 4352 */ 4353 char_u * 4354 getnextcomp(fname) 4355 char_u *fname; 4356 { 4357 while (*fname && !vim_ispathsep(*fname)) 4358 mb_ptr_adv(fname); 4359 if (*fname) 4360 ++fname; 4361 return fname; 4362 } 4363 4364 /* 4365 * Get a pointer to one character past the head of a path name. 4366 * Unix: after "/"; DOS: after "c:\"; Amiga: after "disk:/"; Mac: no head. 4367 * If there is no head, path is returned. 4368 */ 4369 char_u * 4370 get_past_head(path) 4371 char_u *path; 4372 { 4373 char_u *retval; 4374 4375 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) 4376 /* may skip "c:" */ 4377 if (isalpha(path[0]) && path[1] == ':') 4378 retval = path + 2; 4379 else 4380 retval = path; 4381 #else 4382 # if defined(AMIGA) 4383 /* may skip "label:" */ 4384 retval = vim_strchr(path, ':'); 4385 if (retval == NULL) 4386 retval = path; 4387 # else /* Unix */ 4388 retval = path; 4389 # endif 4390 #endif 4391 4392 while (vim_ispathsep(*retval)) 4393 ++retval; 4394 4395 return retval; 4396 } 4397 4398 /* 4399 * return TRUE if 'c' is a path separator. 4400 */ 4401 int 4402 vim_ispathsep(c) 4403 int c; 4404 { 4405 #ifdef RISCOS 4406 return (c == '.' || c == ':'); 4407 #else 4408 # ifdef UNIX 4409 return (c == '/'); /* UNIX has ':' inside file names */ 4410 # else 4411 # ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME 4412 return (c == ':' || c == '/' || c == '\\'); 4413 # else 4414 # ifdef VMS 4415 /* server"user passwd"::device:[full.path.name]fname.extension;version" */ 4416 return (c == ':' || c == '[' || c == ']' || c == '/' 4417 || c == '<' || c == '>' || c == '"' ); 4418 # else 4419 # ifdef COLON_AS_PATHSEP 4420 return (c == ':'); 4421 # else /* Amiga */ 4422 return (c == ':' || c == '/'); 4423 # endif 4424 # endif /* VMS */ 4425 # endif 4426 # endif 4427 #endif /* RISC OS */ 4428 } 4429 4430 #if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH) || defined(PROTO) 4431 /* 4432 * return TRUE if 'c' is a path list separator. 4433 */ 4434 int 4435 vim_ispathlistsep(c) 4436 int c; 4437 { 4438 #ifdef UNIX 4439 return (c == ':'); 4440 #else 4441 return (c == ';'); /* might not be rigth for every system... */ 4442 #endif 4443 } 4444 #endif 4445 4446 #if (defined(CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME) && defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME)) \ 4447 || defined(PROTO) 4448 /* 4449 * Versions of fnamecmp() and fnamencmp() that handle '/' and '\' equally. 4450 */ 4451 int 4452 vim_fnamecmp(x, y) 4453 char_u *x, *y; 4454 { 4455 return vim_fnamencmp(x, y, MAXPATHL); 4456 } 4457 4458 int 4459 vim_fnamencmp(x, y, len) 4460 char_u *x, *y; 4461 size_t len; 4462 { 4463 while (len > 0 && *x && *y) 4464 { 4465 if (TOLOWER_LOC(*x) != TOLOWER_LOC(*y) 4466 && !(*x == '/' && *y == '\\') 4467 && !(*x == '\\' && *y == '/')) 4468 break; 4469 ++x; 4470 ++y; 4471 --len; 4472 } 4473 if (len == 0) 4474 return 0; 4475 return (*x - *y); 4476 } 4477 #endif 4478 4479 /* 4480 * Concatenate file names fname1 and fname2 into allocated memory. 4481 * Only add a '/' or '\\' when 'sep' is TRUE and it is neccesary. 4482 */ 4483 char_u * 4484 concat_fnames(fname1, fname2, sep) 4485 char_u *fname1; 4486 char_u *fname2; 4487 int sep; 4488 { 4489 char_u *dest; 4490 4491 dest = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(fname1) + STRLEN(fname2) + 3)); 4492 if (dest != NULL) 4493 { 4494 STRCPY(dest, fname1); 4495 if (sep) 4496 add_pathsep(dest); 4497 STRCAT(dest, fname2); 4498 } 4499 return dest; 4500 } 4501 4502 #if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(FEAT_GETTEXT) || defined(PROTO) 4503 /* 4504 * Concatenate two strings and return the result in allocated memory. 4505 * Returns NULL when out of memory. 4506 */ 4507 char_u * 4508 concat_str(str1, str2) 4509 char_u *str1; 4510 char_u *str2; 4511 { 4512 char_u *dest; 4513 size_t l = STRLEN(str1); 4514 4515 dest = alloc((unsigned)(l + STRLEN(str2) + 1L)); 4516 if (dest != NULL) 4517 { 4518 STRCPY(dest, str1); 4519 STRCPY(dest + l, str2); 4520 } 4521 return dest; 4522 } 4523 #endif 4524 4525 /* 4526 * Add a path separator to a file name, unless it already ends in a path 4527 * separator. 4528 */ 4529 void 4530 add_pathsep(p) 4531 char_u *p; 4532 { 4533 if (*p != NUL && !after_pathsep(p, p + STRLEN(p))) 4534 STRCAT(p, PATHSEPSTR); 4535 } 4536 4537 /* 4538 * FullName_save - Make an allocated copy of a full file name. 4539 * Returns NULL when out of memory. 4540 */ 4541 char_u * 4542 FullName_save(fname, force) 4543 char_u *fname; 4544 int force; /* force expansion, even when it already looks 4545 like a full path name */ 4546 { 4547 char_u *buf; 4548 char_u *new_fname = NULL; 4549 4550 if (fname == NULL) 4551 return NULL; 4552 4553 buf = alloc((unsigned)MAXPATHL); 4554 if (buf != NULL) 4555 { 4556 if (vim_FullName(fname, buf, MAXPATHL, force) != FAIL) 4557 new_fname = vim_strsave(buf); 4558 else 4559 new_fname = vim_strsave(fname); 4560 vim_free(buf); 4561 } 4562 return new_fname; 4563 } 4564 4565 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SYN_HL) 4566 4567 static char_u *skip_string __ARGS((char_u *p)); 4568 4569 /* 4570 * Find the start of a comment, not knowing if we are in a comment right now. 4571 * Search starts at w_cursor.lnum and goes backwards. 4572 */ 4573 pos_T * 4574 find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */ 4575 int ind_maxcomment; 4576 { 4577 pos_T *pos; 4578 char_u *line; 4579 char_u *p; 4580 4581 if ((pos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '*', FM_BACKWARD, ind_maxcomment)) == NULL) 4582 return NULL; 4583 4584 /* 4585 * Check if the comment start we found is inside a string. 4586 */ 4587 line = ml_get(pos->lnum); 4588 for (p = line; *p && (unsigned)(p - line) < pos->col; ++p) 4589 p = skip_string(p); 4590 if ((unsigned)(p - line) > pos->col) 4591 return NULL; 4592 return pos; 4593 } 4594 4595 /* 4596 * Skip to the end of a "string" and a 'c' character. 4597 * If there is no string or character, return argument unmodified. 4598 */ 4599 static char_u * 4600 skip_string(p) 4601 char_u *p; 4602 { 4603 int i; 4604 4605 /* 4606 * We loop, because strings may be concatenated: "date""time". 4607 */ 4608 for ( ; ; ++p) 4609 { 4610 if (p[0] == '\'') /* 'c' or '\n' or '\000' */ 4611 { 4612 if (!p[1]) /* ' at end of line */ 4613 break; 4614 i = 2; 4615 if (p[1] == '\\') /* '\n' or '\000' */ 4616 { 4617 ++i; 4618 while (vim_isdigit(p[i - 1])) /* '\000' */ 4619 ++i; 4620 } 4621 if (p[i] == '\'') /* check for trailing ' */ 4622 { 4623 p += i; 4624 continue; 4625 } 4626 } 4627 else if (p[0] == '"') /* start of string */ 4628 { 4629 for (++p; p[0]; ++p) 4630 { 4631 if (p[0] == '\\' && p[1] != NUL) 4632 ++p; 4633 else if (p[0] == '"') /* end of string */ 4634 break; 4635 } 4636 if (p[0] == '"') 4637 continue; 4638 } 4639 break; /* no string found */ 4640 } 4641 if (!*p) 4642 --p; /* backup from NUL */ 4643 return p; 4644 } 4645 #endif /* FEAT_CINDENT || FEAT_SYN_HL */ 4646 4647 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(PROTO) 4648 4649 /* 4650 * Do C or expression indenting on the current line. 4651 */ 4652 void 4653 do_c_expr_indent() 4654 { 4655 # ifdef FEAT_EVAL 4656 if (*curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL) 4657 fixthisline(get_expr_indent); 4658 else 4659 # endif 4660 fixthisline(get_c_indent); 4661 } 4662 4663 /* 4664 * Functions for C-indenting. 4665 * Most of this originally comes from Eric Fischer. 4666 */ 4667 /* 4668 * Below "XXX" means that this function may unlock the current line. 4669 */ 4670 4671 static char_u *cin_skipcomment __ARGS((char_u *)); 4672 static int cin_nocode __ARGS((char_u *)); 4673 static pos_T *find_line_comment __ARGS((void)); 4674 static int cin_islabel_skip __ARGS((char_u **)); 4675 static int cin_isdefault __ARGS((char_u *)); 4676 static char_u *after_label __ARGS((char_u *l)); 4677 static int get_indent_nolabel __ARGS((linenr_T lnum)); 4678 static int skip_label __ARGS((linenr_T, char_u **pp, int ind_maxcomment)); 4679 static int cin_first_id_amount __ARGS((void)); 4680 static int cin_get_equal_amount __ARGS((linenr_T lnum)); 4681 static int cin_ispreproc __ARGS((char_u *)); 4682 static int cin_ispreproc_cont __ARGS((char_u **pp, linenr_T *lnump)); 4683 static int cin_iscomment __ARGS((char_u *)); 4684 static int cin_islinecomment __ARGS((char_u *)); 4685 static int cin_isterminated __ARGS((char_u *, int, int)); 4686 static int cin_isinit __ARGS((void)); 4687 static int cin_isfuncdecl __ARGS((char_u **, linenr_T)); 4688 static int cin_isif __ARGS((char_u *)); 4689 static int cin_iselse __ARGS((char_u *)); 4690 static int cin_isdo __ARGS((char_u *)); 4691 static int cin_iswhileofdo __ARGS((char_u *, linenr_T, int)); 4692 static int cin_isbreak __ARGS((char_u *)); 4693 static int cin_is_cpp_baseclass __ARGS((char_u *line, colnr_T *col)); 4694 static int cin_ends_in __ARGS((char_u *, char_u *, char_u *)); 4695 static int cin_skip2pos __ARGS((pos_T *trypos)); 4696 static pos_T *find_start_brace __ARGS((int)); 4697 static pos_T *find_match_paren __ARGS((int, int)); 4698 static int corr_ind_maxparen __ARGS((int ind_maxparen, pos_T *startpos)); 4699 static int find_last_paren __ARGS((char_u *l, int start, int end)); 4700 static int find_match __ARGS((int lookfor, linenr_T ourscope, int ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment)); 4701 4702 /* 4703 * Skip over white space and C comments within the line. 4704 */ 4705 static char_u * 4706 cin_skipcomment(s) 4707 char_u *s; 4708 { 4709 while (*s) 4710 { 4711 s = skipwhite(s); 4712 if (*s != '/') 4713 break; 4714 ++s; 4715 if (*s == '/') /* slash-slash comment continues till eol */ 4716 { 4717 s += STRLEN(s); 4718 break; 4719 } 4720 if (*s != '*') 4721 break; 4722 for (++s; *s; ++s) /* skip slash-star comment */ 4723 if (s[0] == '*' && s[1] == '/') 4724 { 4725 s += 2; 4726 break; 4727 } 4728 } 4729 return s; 4730 } 4731 4732 /* 4733 * Return TRUE if there there is no code at *s. White space and comments are 4734 * not considered code. 4735 */ 4736 static int 4737 cin_nocode(s) 4738 char_u *s; 4739 { 4740 return *cin_skipcomment(s) == NUL; 4741 } 4742 4743 /* 4744 * Check previous lines for a "//" line comment, skipping over blank lines. 4745 */ 4746 static pos_T * 4747 find_line_comment() /* XXX */ 4748 { 4749 static pos_T pos; 4750 char_u *line; 4751 char_u *p; 4752 4753 pos = curwin->w_cursor; 4754 while (--pos.lnum > 0) 4755 { 4756 line = ml_get(pos.lnum); 4757 p = skipwhite(line); 4758 if (cin_islinecomment(p)) 4759 { 4760 pos.col = (int)(p - line); 4761 return &pos; 4762 } 4763 if (*p != NUL) 4764 break; 4765 } 4766 return NULL; 4767 } 4768 4769 /* 4770 * Check if string matches "label:"; move to character after ':' if true. 4771 */ 4772 static int 4773 cin_islabel_skip(s) 4774 char_u **s; 4775 { 4776 if (!vim_isIDc(**s)) /* need at least one ID character */ 4777 return FALSE; 4778 4779 while (vim_isIDc(**s)) 4780 (*s)++; 4781 4782 *s = cin_skipcomment(*s); 4783 4784 /* "::" is not a label, it's C++ */ 4785 return (**s == ':' && *++*s != ':'); 4786 } 4787 4788 /* 4789 * Recognize a label: "label:". 4790 * Note: curwin->w_cursor must be where we are looking for the label. 4791 */ 4792 int 4793 cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */ 4794 int ind_maxcomment; 4795 { 4796 char_u *s; 4797 4798 s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 4799 4800 /* 4801 * Exclude "default" from labels, since it should be indented 4802 * like a switch label. Same for C++ scope declarations. 4803 */ 4804 if (cin_isdefault(s)) 4805 return FALSE; 4806 if (cin_isscopedecl(s)) 4807 return FALSE; 4808 4809 if (cin_islabel_skip(&s)) 4810 { 4811 /* 4812 * Only accept a label if the previous line is terminated or is a case 4813 * label. 4814 */ 4815 pos_T cursor_save; 4816 pos_T *trypos; 4817 char_u *line; 4818 4819 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor; 4820 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1) 4821 { 4822 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 4823 4824 /* 4825 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment. 4826 */ 4827 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 4828 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */ 4829 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos; 4830 4831 line = ml_get_curline(); 4832 if (cin_ispreproc(line)) /* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */ 4833 continue; 4834 if (*(line = cin_skipcomment(line)) == NUL) 4835 continue; 4836 4837 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save; 4838 if (cin_isterminated(line, TRUE, FALSE) 4839 || cin_isscopedecl(line) 4840 || cin_iscase(line) 4841 || (cin_islabel_skip(&line) && cin_nocode(line))) 4842 return TRUE; 4843 return FALSE; 4844 } 4845 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save; 4846 return TRUE; /* label at start of file??? */ 4847 } 4848 return FALSE; 4849 } 4850 4851 /* 4852 * Recognize structure initialization and enumerations. 4853 * Q&D-Implementation: 4854 * check for "=" at end or "[typedef] enum" at beginning of line. 4855 */ 4856 static int 4857 cin_isinit(void) 4858 { 4859 char_u *s; 4860 4861 s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 4862 4863 if (STRNCMP(s, "typedef", 7) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[7])) 4864 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7); 4865 4866 if (STRNCMP(s, "enum", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4])) 4867 return TRUE; 4868 4869 if (cin_ends_in(s, (char_u *)"=", (char_u *)"{")) 4870 return TRUE; 4871 4872 return FALSE; 4873 } 4874 4875 /* 4876 * Recognize a switch label: "case .*:" or "default:". 4877 */ 4878 int 4879 cin_iscase(s) 4880 char_u *s; 4881 { 4882 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 4883 if (STRNCMP(s, "case", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4])) 4884 { 4885 for (s += 4; *s; ++s) 4886 { 4887 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 4888 if (*s == ':') 4889 { 4890 if (s[1] == ':') /* skip over "::" for C++ */ 4891 ++s; 4892 else 4893 return TRUE; 4894 } 4895 if (*s == '\'' && s[1] && s[2] == '\'') 4896 s += 2; /* skip over '.' */ 4897 else if (*s == '/' && (s[1] == '*' || s[1] == '/')) 4898 return FALSE; /* stop at comment */ 4899 else if (*s == '"') 4900 return FALSE; /* stop at string */ 4901 } 4902 return FALSE; 4903 } 4904 4905 if (cin_isdefault(s)) 4906 return TRUE; 4907 return FALSE; 4908 } 4909 4910 /* 4911 * Recognize a "default" switch label. 4912 */ 4913 static int 4914 cin_isdefault(s) 4915 char_u *s; 4916 { 4917 return (STRNCMP(s, "default", 7) == 0 4918 && *(s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7)) == ':' 4919 && s[1] != ':'); 4920 } 4921 4922 /* 4923 * Recognize a "public/private/proctected" scope declaration label. 4924 */ 4925 int 4926 cin_isscopedecl(s) 4927 char_u *s; 4928 { 4929 int i; 4930 4931 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 4932 if (STRNCMP(s, "public", 6) == 0) 4933 i = 6; 4934 else if (STRNCMP(s, "protected", 9) == 0) 4935 i = 9; 4936 else if (STRNCMP(s, "private", 7) == 0) 4937 i = 7; 4938 else 4939 return FALSE; 4940 return (*(s = cin_skipcomment(s + i)) == ':' && s[1] != ':'); 4941 } 4942 4943 /* 4944 * Return a pointer to the first non-empty non-comment character after a ':'. 4945 * Return NULL if not found. 4946 * case 234: a = b; 4947 * ^ 4948 */ 4949 static char_u * 4950 after_label(l) 4951 char_u *l; 4952 { 4953 for ( ; *l; ++l) 4954 { 4955 if (*l == ':') 4956 { 4957 if (l[1] == ':') /* skip over "::" for C++ */ 4958 ++l; 4959 else if (!cin_iscase(l + 1)) 4960 break; 4961 } 4962 else if (*l == '\'' && l[1] && l[2] == '\'') 4963 l += 2; /* skip over 'x' */ 4964 } 4965 if (*l == NUL) 4966 return NULL; 4967 l = cin_skipcomment(l + 1); 4968 if (*l == NUL) 4969 return NULL; 4970 return l; 4971 } 4972 4973 /* 4974 * Get indent of line "lnum", skipping a label. 4975 * Return 0 if there is nothing after the label. 4976 */ 4977 static int 4978 get_indent_nolabel(lnum) /* XXX */ 4979 linenr_T lnum; 4980 { 4981 char_u *l; 4982 pos_T fp; 4983 colnr_T col; 4984 char_u *p; 4985 4986 l = ml_get(lnum); 4987 p = after_label(l); 4988 if (p == NULL) 4989 return 0; 4990 4991 fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - l); 4992 fp.lnum = lnum; 4993 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL); 4994 return (int)col; 4995 } 4996 4997 /* 4998 * Find indent for line "lnum", ignoring any case or jump label. 4999 * Also return a pointer to the text (after the label). 5000 * label: if (asdf && asdfasdf) 5001 * ^ 5002 */ 5003 static int 5004 skip_label(lnum, pp, ind_maxcomment) 5005 linenr_T lnum; 5006 char_u **pp; 5007 int ind_maxcomment; 5008 { 5009 char_u *l; 5010 int amount; 5011 pos_T cursor_save; 5012 5013 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor; 5014 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum; 5015 l = ml_get_curline(); 5016 /* XXX */ 5017 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l) || cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)) 5018 { 5019 amount = get_indent_nolabel(lnum); 5020 l = after_label(ml_get_curline()); 5021 if (l == NULL) /* just in case */ 5022 l = ml_get_curline(); 5023 } 5024 else 5025 { 5026 amount = get_indent(); 5027 l = ml_get_curline(); 5028 } 5029 *pp = l; 5030 5031 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save; 5032 return amount; 5033 } 5034 5035 /* 5036 * Return the indent of the first variable name after a type in a declaration. 5037 * int a, indent of "a" 5038 * static struct foo b, indent of "b" 5039 * enum bla c, indent of "c" 5040 * Returns zero when it doesn't look like a declaration. 5041 */ 5042 static int 5043 cin_first_id_amount() 5044 { 5045 char_u *line, *p, *s; 5046 int len; 5047 pos_T fp; 5048 colnr_T col; 5049 5050 line = ml_get_curline(); 5051 p = skipwhite(line); 5052 len = skiptowhite(p) - p; 5053 if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "static", 6) == 0) 5054 { 5055 p = skipwhite(p + 6); 5056 len = skiptowhite(p) - p; 5057 } 5058 if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "struct", 6) == 0) 5059 p = skipwhite(p + 6); 5060 else if (len == 4 && STRNCMP(p, "enum", 4) == 0) 5061 p = skipwhite(p + 4); 5062 else if ((len == 8 && STRNCMP(p, "unsigned", 8) == 0) 5063 || (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "signed", 6) == 0)) 5064 { 5065 s = skipwhite(p + len); 5066 if ((STRNCMP(s, "int", 3) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[3])) 5067 || (STRNCMP(s, "long", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4])) 5068 || (STRNCMP(s, "short", 5) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[5])) 5069 || (STRNCMP(s, "char", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4]))) 5070 p = s; 5071 } 5072 for (len = 0; vim_isIDc(p[len]); ++len) 5073 ; 5074 if (len == 0 || !vim_iswhite(p[len]) || cin_nocode(p)) 5075 return 0; 5076 5077 p = skipwhite(p + len); 5078 fp.lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 5079 fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - line); 5080 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL); 5081 return (int)col; 5082 } 5083 5084 /* 5085 * Return the indent of the first non-blank after an equal sign. 5086 * char *foo = "here"; 5087 * Return zero if no (useful) equal sign found. 5088 * Return -1 if the line above "lnum" ends in a backslash. 5089 * foo = "asdf\ 5090 * asdf\ 5091 * here"; 5092 */ 5093 static int 5094 cin_get_equal_amount(lnum) 5095 linenr_T lnum; 5096 { 5097 char_u *line; 5098 char_u *s; 5099 colnr_T col; 5100 pos_T fp; 5101 5102 if (lnum > 1) 5103 { 5104 line = ml_get(lnum - 1); 5105 if (*line != NUL && line[STRLEN(line) - 1] == '\\') 5106 return -1; 5107 } 5108 5109 line = s = ml_get(lnum); 5110 while (*s != NUL && vim_strchr((char_u *)"=;{}\"'", *s) == NULL) 5111 { 5112 if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */ 5113 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 5114 else 5115 ++s; 5116 } 5117 if (*s != '=') 5118 return 0; 5119 5120 s = skipwhite(s + 1); 5121 if (cin_nocode(s)) 5122 return 0; 5123 5124 if (*s == '"') /* nice alignment for continued strings */ 5125 ++s; 5126 5127 fp.lnum = lnum; 5128 fp.col = (colnr_T)(s - line); 5129 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL); 5130 return (int)col; 5131 } 5132 5133 /* 5134 * Recognize a preprocessor statement: Any line that starts with '#'. 5135 */ 5136 static int 5137 cin_ispreproc(s) 5138 char_u *s; 5139 { 5140 s = skipwhite(s); 5141 if (*s == '#') 5142 return TRUE; 5143 return FALSE; 5144 } 5145 5146 /* 5147 * Return TRUE if line "*pp" at "*lnump" is a preprocessor statement or a 5148 * continuation line of a preprocessor statement. Decrease "*lnump" to the 5149 * start and return the line in "*pp". 5150 */ 5151 static int 5152 cin_ispreproc_cont(pp, lnump) 5153 char_u **pp; 5154 linenr_T *lnump; 5155 { 5156 char_u *line = *pp; 5157 linenr_T lnum = *lnump; 5158 int retval = FALSE; 5159 5160 for (;;) 5161 { 5162 if (cin_ispreproc(line)) 5163 { 5164 retval = TRUE; 5165 *lnump = lnum; 5166 break; 5167 } 5168 if (lnum == 1) 5169 break; 5170 line = ml_get(--lnum); 5171 if (*line == NUL || line[STRLEN(line) - 1] != '\\') 5172 break; 5173 } 5174 5175 if (lnum != *lnump) 5176 *pp = ml_get(*lnump); 5177 return retval; 5178 } 5179 5180 /* 5181 * Recognize the start of a C or C++ comment. 5182 */ 5183 static int 5184 cin_iscomment(p) 5185 char_u *p; 5186 { 5187 return (p[0] == '/' && (p[1] == '*' || p[1] == '/')); 5188 } 5189 5190 /* 5191 * Recognize the start of a "//" comment. 5192 */ 5193 static int 5194 cin_islinecomment(p) 5195 char_u *p; 5196 { 5197 return (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '/'); 5198 } 5199 5200 /* 5201 * Recognize a line that starts with '{' or '}', or ends with ';', '{' or '}'. 5202 * Don't consider "} else" a terminated line. 5203 * Return the character terminating the line (ending char's have precedence if 5204 * both apply in order to determine initializations). 5205 */ 5206 static int 5207 cin_isterminated(s, incl_open, incl_comma) 5208 char_u *s; 5209 int incl_open; /* include '{' at the end as terminator */ 5210 int incl_comma; /* recognize a trailing comma */ 5211 { 5212 char_u found_start = 0; 5213 5214 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 5215 5216 if (*s == '{' || (*s == '}' && !cin_iselse(s))) 5217 found_start = *s; 5218 5219 while (*s) 5220 { 5221 /* skip over comments, "" strings and 'c'haracters */ 5222 s = skip_string(cin_skipcomment(s)); 5223 if ((*s == ';' || (incl_open && *s == '{') || *s == '}' 5224 || (incl_comma && *s == ',')) 5225 && cin_nocode(s + 1)) 5226 return *s; 5227 5228 if (*s) 5229 s++; 5230 } 5231 return found_start; 5232 } 5233 5234 /* 5235 * Recognize the basic picture of a function declaration -- it needs to 5236 * have an open paren somewhere and a close paren at the end of the line and 5237 * no semicolons anywhere. 5238 * When a line ends in a comma we continue looking in the next line. 5239 * "sp" points to a string with the line. When looking at other lines it must 5240 * be restored to the line. When it's NULL fetch lines here. 5241 * "lnum" is where we start looking. 5242 */ 5243 static int 5244 cin_isfuncdecl(sp, first_lnum) 5245 char_u **sp; 5246 linenr_T first_lnum; 5247 { 5248 char_u *s; 5249 linenr_T lnum = first_lnum; 5250 int retval = FALSE; 5251 5252 if (sp == NULL) 5253 s = ml_get(lnum); 5254 else 5255 s = *sp; 5256 5257 while (*s && *s != '(' && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"') 5258 { 5259 if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */ 5260 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 5261 else 5262 ++s; 5263 } 5264 if (*s != '(') 5265 return FALSE; /* ';', ' or " before any () or no '(' */ 5266 5267 while (*s && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"') 5268 { 5269 if (*s == ')' && cin_nocode(s + 1)) 5270 { 5271 /* ')' at the end: may have found a match 5272 * Check for he previous line not to end in a backslash: 5273 * #if defined(x) && \ 5274 * defined(y) 5275 */ 5276 lnum = first_lnum - 1; 5277 s = ml_get(lnum); 5278 if (*s == NUL || s[STRLEN(s) - 1] != '\\') 5279 retval = TRUE; 5280 goto done; 5281 } 5282 if (*s == ',' && cin_nocode(s + 1)) 5283 { 5284 /* ',' at the end: continue looking in the next line */ 5285 if (lnum >= curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count) 5286 break; 5287 5288 s = ml_get(++lnum); 5289 } 5290 else if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */ 5291 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 5292 else 5293 ++s; 5294 } 5295 5296 done: 5297 if (lnum != first_lnum && sp != NULL) 5298 *sp = ml_get(first_lnum); 5299 5300 return retval; 5301 } 5302 5303 static int 5304 cin_isif(p) 5305 char_u *p; 5306 { 5307 return (STRNCMP(p, "if", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2])); 5308 } 5309 5310 static int 5311 cin_iselse(p) 5312 char_u *p; 5313 { 5314 if (*p == '}') /* accept "} else" */ 5315 p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1); 5316 return (STRNCMP(p, "else", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[4])); 5317 } 5318 5319 static int 5320 cin_isdo(p) 5321 char_u *p; 5322 { 5323 return (STRNCMP(p, "do", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2])); 5324 } 5325 5326 /* 5327 * Check if this is a "while" that should have a matching "do". 5328 * We only accept a "while (condition) ;", with only white space between the 5329 * ')' and ';'. The condition may be spread over several lines. 5330 */ 5331 static int 5332 cin_iswhileofdo(p, lnum, ind_maxparen) /* XXX */ 5333 char_u *p; 5334 linenr_T lnum; 5335 int ind_maxparen; 5336 { 5337 pos_T cursor_save; 5338 pos_T *trypos; 5339 int retval = FALSE; 5340 5341 p = cin_skipcomment(p); 5342 if (*p == '}') /* accept "} while (cond);" */ 5343 p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1); 5344 if (STRNCMP(p, "while", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5])) 5345 { 5346 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor; 5347 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum; 5348 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 5349 p = ml_get_curline(); 5350 while (*p && *p != 'w') /* skip any '}', until the 'w' of the "while" */ 5351 { 5352 ++p; 5353 ++curwin->w_cursor.col; 5354 } 5355 if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, 0, 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL 5356 && *cin_skipcomment(ml_get_pos(trypos) + 1) == ';') 5357 retval = TRUE; 5358 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save; 5359 } 5360 return retval; 5361 } 5362 5363 static int 5364 cin_isbreak(p) 5365 char_u *p; 5366 { 5367 return (STRNCMP(p, "break", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5])); 5368 } 5369 5370 /* Find the position of a C++ base-class declaration or 5371 * constructor-initialization. eg: 5372 * 5373 * class MyClass : 5374 * baseClass <-- here 5375 * class MyClass : public baseClass, 5376 * anotherBaseClass <-- here (should probably lineup ??) 5377 * MyClass::MyClass(...) : 5378 * baseClass(...) <-- here (constructor-initialization) 5379 */ 5380 static int 5381 cin_is_cpp_baseclass(line, col) 5382 char_u *line; 5383 colnr_T *col; 5384 { 5385 char_u *s; 5386 int class_or_struct, lookfor_ctor_init, cpp_base_class; 5387 5388 *col = 0; 5389 5390 s = skipwhite(line); 5391 if (*s == '#') /* skip #define FOO x ? (x) : x */ 5392 return FALSE; 5393 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 5394 if (*s == NUL) 5395 return FALSE; 5396 5397 cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE; 5398 5399 while(*s != NUL) 5400 { 5401 if (s[0] == ':') 5402 { 5403 if (s[1] == ':') 5404 { 5405 /* skip double colon. It can't be a constructor 5406 * initialization any more */ 5407 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE; 5408 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 2); 5409 } 5410 else if (lookfor_ctor_init || class_or_struct) 5411 { 5412 /* we have something found, that looks like the start of 5413 * cpp-base-class-declaration or contructor-initialization */ 5414 cpp_base_class = TRUE; 5415 lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE; 5416 *col = 0; 5417 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1); 5418 } 5419 else 5420 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1); 5421 } 5422 else if ((STRNCMP(s, "class", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[5])) 5423 || (STRNCMP(s, "struct", 6) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[6]))) 5424 { 5425 class_or_struct = TRUE; 5426 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE; 5427 5428 if (*s == 'c') 5429 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 5); 5430 else 5431 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 6); 5432 } 5433 else 5434 { 5435 if (s[0] == '{' || s[0] == '}' || s[0] == ';') 5436 { 5437 cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE; 5438 } 5439 else if (s[0] == ')') 5440 { 5441 /* Constructor-initialization is assumed if we come across 5442 * something like "):" */ 5443 class_or_struct = FALSE; 5444 lookfor_ctor_init = TRUE; 5445 } 5446 else if (!vim_isIDc(s[0])) 5447 { 5448 /* if it is not an identifier, we are wrong */ 5449 class_or_struct = FALSE; 5450 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE; 5451 } 5452 else if (*col == 0) 5453 { 5454 /* it can't be a constructor-initialization any more */ 5455 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE; 5456 5457 /* the first statement starts here: lineup with this one... */ 5458 if (cpp_base_class && *col == 0) 5459 *col = (colnr_T)(s - line); 5460 } 5461 5462 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1); 5463 } 5464 } 5465 5466 return cpp_base_class; 5467 } 5468 5469 /* 5470 * Return TRUE if string "s" ends with the string "find", possibly followed by 5471 * white space and comments. Skip strings and comments. 5472 * Ignore "ignore" after "find" if it's not NULL. 5473 */ 5474 static int 5475 cin_ends_in(s, find, ignore) 5476 char_u *s; 5477 char_u *find; 5478 char_u *ignore; 5479 { 5480 char_u *p = s; 5481 char_u *r; 5482 int len = (int)STRLEN(find); 5483 5484 while (*p != NUL) 5485 { 5486 p = cin_skipcomment(p); 5487 if (STRNCMP(p, find, len) == 0) 5488 { 5489 r = skipwhite(p + len); 5490 if (ignore != NULL && STRNCMP(r, ignore, STRLEN(ignore)) == 0) 5491 r = skipwhite(r + STRLEN(ignore)); 5492 if (cin_nocode(r)) 5493 return TRUE; 5494 } 5495 if (*p != NUL) 5496 ++p; 5497 } 5498 return FALSE; 5499 } 5500 5501 /* 5502 * Skip strings, chars and comments until at or past "trypos". 5503 * Return the column found. 5504 */ 5505 static int 5506 cin_skip2pos(trypos) 5507 pos_T *trypos; 5508 { 5509 char_u *line; 5510 char_u *p; 5511 5512 p = line = ml_get(trypos->lnum); 5513 while (*p && (colnr_T)(p - line) < trypos->col) 5514 { 5515 if (cin_iscomment(p)) 5516 p = cin_skipcomment(p); 5517 else 5518 { 5519 p = skip_string(p); 5520 ++p; 5521 } 5522 } 5523 return (int)(p - line); 5524 } 5525 5526 /* 5527 * Find the '{' at the start of the block we are in. 5528 * Return NULL if no match found. 5529 * Ignore a '{' that is in a comment, makes indenting the next three lines 5530 * work. */ 5531 /* foo() */ 5532 /* { */ 5533 /* } */ 5534 5535 static pos_T * 5536 find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */ 5537 int ind_maxcomment; 5538 { 5539 pos_T cursor_save; 5540 pos_T *trypos; 5541 pos_T *pos; 5542 static pos_T pos_copy; 5543 5544 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor; 5545 while ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '{', FM_BLOCKSTOP, 0)) != NULL) 5546 { 5547 pos_copy = *trypos; /* copy pos_T, next findmatch will change it */ 5548 trypos = &pos_copy; 5549 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos; 5550 pos = NULL; 5551 /* ignore the { if it's in a // comment */ 5552 if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) == trypos->col 5553 && (pos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) == NULL) /* XXX */ 5554 break; 5555 if (pos != NULL) 5556 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum; 5557 } 5558 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save; 5559 return trypos; 5560 } 5561 5562 /* 5563 * Find the matching '(', failing if it is in a comment. 5564 * Return NULL of no match found. 5565 */ 5566 static pos_T * 5567 find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */ 5568 int ind_maxparen; 5569 int ind_maxcomment; 5570 { 5571 pos_T cursor_save; 5572 pos_T *trypos; 5573 static pos_T pos_copy; 5574 5575 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor; 5576 if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '(', 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL) 5577 { 5578 /* check if the ( is in a // comment */ 5579 if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) > trypos->col) 5580 trypos = NULL; 5581 else 5582 { 5583 pos_copy = *trypos; /* copy trypos, findmatch will change it */ 5584 trypos = &pos_copy; 5585 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos; 5586 if (find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) != NULL) /* XXX */ 5587 trypos = NULL; 5588 } 5589 } 5590 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save; 5591 return trypos; 5592 } 5593 5594 /* 5595 * Return ind_maxparen corrected for the difference in line number between the 5596 * cursor position and "startpos". This makes sure that searching for a 5597 * matching paren above the cursor line doesn't find a match because of 5598 * looking a few lines further. 5599 */ 5600 static int 5601 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, startpos) 5602 int ind_maxparen; 5603 pos_T *startpos; 5604 { 5605 long n = (long)startpos->lnum - (long)curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 5606 5607 if (n > 0 && n < ind_maxparen / 2) 5608 return ind_maxparen - (int)n; 5609 return ind_maxparen; 5610 } 5611 5612 /* 5613 * Set w_cursor.col to the column number of the last unmatched ')' or '{' in 5614 * line "l". 5615 */ 5616 static int 5617 find_last_paren(l, start, end) 5618 char_u *l; 5619 int start, end; 5620 { 5621 int i; 5622 int retval = FALSE; 5623 int open_count = 0; 5624 5625 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; /* default is start of line */ 5626 5627 for (i = 0; l[i]; i++) 5628 { 5629 i = (int)(cin_skipcomment(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in comments */ 5630 i = (int)(skip_string(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in quotes */ 5631 if (l[i] == start) 5632 ++open_count; 5633 else if (l[i] == end) 5634 { 5635 if (open_count > 0) 5636 --open_count; 5637 else 5638 { 5639 curwin->w_cursor.col = i; 5640 retval = TRUE; 5641 } 5642 } 5643 } 5644 return retval; 5645 } 5646 5647 int 5648 get_c_indent() 5649 { 5650 /* 5651 * spaces from a block's opening brace the prevailing indent for that 5652 * block should be 5653 */ 5654 int ind_level = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5655 5656 /* 5657 * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace that's at the end of a 5658 * line is imagined to be. 5659 */ 5660 int ind_open_imag = 0; 5661 5662 /* 5663 * spaces from the prevailing indent for a line that is not precededof by 5664 * an opening brace. 5665 */ 5666 int ind_no_brace = 0; 5667 5668 /* 5669 * column where the first { of a function should be located } 5670 */ 5671 int ind_first_open = 0; 5672 5673 /* 5674 * spaces from the prevailing indent a leftmost open brace should be 5675 * located 5676 */ 5677 int ind_open_extra = 0; 5678 5679 /* 5680 * spaces from the matching open brace (real location for one at the left 5681 * edge; imaginary location from one that ends a line) the matching close 5682 * brace should be located 5683 */ 5684 int ind_close_extra = 0; 5685 5686 /* 5687 * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace sitting in the leftmost 5688 * column is imagined to be 5689 */ 5690 int ind_open_left_imag = 0; 5691 5692 /* 5693 * spaces from the switch() indent a "case xx" label should be located 5694 */ 5695 int ind_case = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5696 5697 /* 5698 * spaces from the "case xx:" code after a switch() should be located 5699 */ 5700 int ind_case_code = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5701 5702 /* 5703 * lineup break at end of case in switch() with case label 5704 */ 5705 int ind_case_break = 0; 5706 5707 /* 5708 * spaces from the class declaration indent a scope declaration label 5709 * should be located 5710 */ 5711 int ind_scopedecl = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5712 5713 /* 5714 * spaces from the scope declaration label code should be located 5715 */ 5716 int ind_scopedecl_code = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5717 5718 /* 5719 * amount K&R-style parameters should be indented 5720 */ 5721 int ind_param = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5722 5723 /* 5724 * amount a function type spec should be indented 5725 */ 5726 int ind_func_type = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5727 5728 /* 5729 * amount a cpp base class declaration or constructor initialization 5730 * should be indented 5731 */ 5732 int ind_cpp_baseclass = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5733 5734 /* 5735 * additional spaces beyond the prevailing indent a continuation line 5736 * should be located 5737 */ 5738 int ind_continuation = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5739 5740 /* 5741 * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses 5742 */ 5743 int ind_unclosed = curbuf->b_p_sw * 2; 5744 5745 /* 5746 * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses, which 5747 * itself is also unclosed 5748 */ 5749 int ind_unclosed2 = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5750 5751 /* 5752 * suppress ignoring spaces from the indent of a line starting with an 5753 * unclosed parentheses. 5754 */ 5755 int ind_unclosed_noignore = 0; 5756 5757 /* 5758 * If the opening paren is the last nonwhite character on the line, and 5759 * ind_unclosed_wrapped is nonzero, use this indent relative to the outer 5760 * context (for very long lines). 5761 */ 5762 int ind_unclosed_wrapped = 0; 5763 5764 /* 5765 * suppress ignoring white space when lining up with the character after 5766 * an unclosed parentheses. 5767 */ 5768 int ind_unclosed_whiteok = 0; 5769 5770 /* 5771 * indent a closing parentheses under the line start of the matching 5772 * opening parentheses. 5773 */ 5774 int ind_matching_paren = 0; 5775 5776 /* 5777 * Extra indent for comments. 5778 */ 5779 int ind_comment = 0; 5780 5781 /* 5782 * spaces from the comment opener when there is nothing after it. 5783 */ 5784 int ind_in_comment = 3; 5785 5786 /* 5787 * boolean: if non-zero, use ind_in_comment even if there is something 5788 * after the comment opener. 5789 */ 5790 int ind_in_comment2 = 0; 5791 5792 /* 5793 * max lines to search for an open paren 5794 */ 5795 int ind_maxparen = 20; 5796 5797 /* 5798 * max lines to search for an open comment 5799 */ 5800 int ind_maxcomment = 70; 5801 5802 /* 5803 * handle braces for java code 5804 */ 5805 int ind_java = 0; 5806 5807 /* 5808 * handle blocked cases correctly 5809 */ 5810 int ind_keep_case_label = 0; 5811 5812 pos_T cur_curpos; 5813 int amount; 5814 int scope_amount; 5815 int cur_amount; 5816 colnr_T col; 5817 char_u *theline; 5818 char_u *linecopy; 5819 pos_T *trypos; 5820 pos_T *tryposBrace = NULL; 5821 pos_T our_paren_pos; 5822 char_u *start; 5823 int start_brace; 5824 #define BRACE_IN_COL0 1 /* '{' is in comumn 0 */ 5825 #define BRACE_AT_START 2 /* '{' is at start of line */ 5826 #define BRACE_AT_END 3 /* '{' is at end of line */ 5827 linenr_T ourscope; 5828 char_u *l; 5829 char_u *look; 5830 char_u terminated; 5831 int lookfor; 5832 #define LOOKFOR_INITIAL 0 5833 #define LOOKFOR_IF 1 5834 #define LOOKFOR_DO 2 5835 #define LOOKFOR_CASE 3 5836 #define LOOKFOR_ANY 4 5837 #define LOOKFOR_TERM 5 5838 #define LOOKFOR_UNTERM 6 5839 #define LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL 7 5840 #define LOOKFOR_NOBREAK 8 5841 #define LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS 9 5842 #define LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT 10 5843 5844 int whilelevel; 5845 linenr_T lnum; 5846 char_u *options; 5847 int fraction = 0; /* init for GCC */ 5848 int divider; 5849 int n; 5850 int iscase; 5851 int lookfor_break; 5852 int cont_amount = 0; /* amount for continuation line */ 5853 5854 for (options = curbuf->b_p_cino; *options; ) 5855 { 5856 l = options++; 5857 if (*options == '-') 5858 ++options; 5859 n = getdigits(&options); 5860 divider = 0; 5861 if (*options == '.') /* ".5s" means a fraction */ 5862 { 5863 fraction = atol((char *)++options); 5864 while (VIM_ISDIGIT(*options)) 5865 { 5866 ++options; 5867 if (divider) 5868 divider *= 10; 5869 else 5870 divider = 10; 5871 } 5872 } 5873 if (*options == 's') /* "2s" means two times 'shiftwidth' */ 5874 { 5875 if (n == 0 && fraction == 0) 5876 n = curbuf->b_p_sw; /* just "s" is one 'shiftwidth' */ 5877 else 5878 { 5879 n *= curbuf->b_p_sw; 5880 if (divider) 5881 n += (curbuf->b_p_sw * fraction + divider / 2) / divider; 5882 } 5883 ++options; 5884 } 5885 if (l[1] == '-') 5886 n = -n; 5887 /* When adding an entry here, also update the default 'cinoptions' in 5888 * change.txt, and add explanation for it! */ 5889 switch (*l) 5890 { 5891 case '>': ind_level = n; break; 5892 case 'e': ind_open_imag = n; break; 5893 case 'n': ind_no_brace = n; break; 5894 case 'f': ind_first_open = n; break; 5895 case '{': ind_open_extra = n; break; 5896 case '}': ind_close_extra = n; break; 5897 case '^': ind_open_left_imag = n; break; 5898 case ':': ind_case = n; break; 5899 case '=': ind_case_code = n; break; 5900 case 'b': ind_case_break = n; break; 5901 case 'p': ind_param = n; break; 5902 case 't': ind_func_type = n; break; 5903 case '/': ind_comment = n; break; 5904 case 'c': ind_in_comment = n; break; 5905 case 'C': ind_in_comment2 = n; break; 5906 case 'i': ind_cpp_baseclass = n; break; 5907 case '+': ind_continuation = n; break; 5908 case '(': ind_unclosed = n; break; 5909 case 'u': ind_unclosed2 = n; break; 5910 case 'U': ind_unclosed_noignore = n; break; 5911 case 'W': ind_unclosed_wrapped = n; break; 5912 case 'w': ind_unclosed_whiteok = n; break; 5913 case 'm': ind_matching_paren = n; break; 5914 case ')': ind_maxparen = n; break; 5915 case '*': ind_maxcomment = n; break; 5916 case 'g': ind_scopedecl = n; break; 5917 case 'h': ind_scopedecl_code = n; break; 5918 case 'j': ind_java = n; break; 5919 case 'l': ind_keep_case_label = n; break; 5920 } 5921 } 5922 5923 /* remember where the cursor was when we started */ 5924 cur_curpos = curwin->w_cursor; 5925 5926 /* Get a copy of the current contents of the line. 5927 * This is required, because only the most recent line obtained with 5928 * ml_get is valid! */ 5929 linecopy = vim_strsave(ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum)); 5930 if (linecopy == NULL) 5931 return 0; 5932 5933 /* 5934 * In insert mode and the cursor is on a ')' truncate the line at the 5935 * cursor position. We don't want to line up with the matching '(' when 5936 * inserting new stuff. 5937 * For unknown reasons the cursor might be past the end of the line, thus 5938 * check for that. 5939 */ 5940 if ((State & INSERT) 5941 && curwin->w_cursor.col < STRLEN(linecopy) 5942 && linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] == ')') 5943 linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL; 5944 5945 theline = skipwhite(linecopy); 5946 5947 /* move the cursor to the start of the line */ 5948 5949 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 5950 5951 /* 5952 * #defines and so on always go at the left when included in 'cinkeys'. 5953 */ 5954 if (*theline == '#' && (*linecopy == '#' || in_cinkeys('#', ' ', TRUE))) 5955 { 5956 amount = 0; 5957 } 5958 5959 /* 5960 * Is it a non-case label? Then that goes at the left margin too. 5961 */ 5962 else if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)) /* XXX */ 5963 { 5964 amount = 0; 5965 } 5966 5967 /* 5968 * If we're inside a "//" comment and there is a "//" comment in a 5969 * previous line, lineup with that one. 5970 */ 5971 else if (cin_islinecomment(theline) 5972 && (trypos = find_line_comment()) != NULL) /* XXX */ 5973 { 5974 /* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */ 5975 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL); 5976 amount = col; 5977 } 5978 5979 /* 5980 * If we're inside a comment and not looking at the start of the 5981 * comment, try using the 'comments' option. 5982 */ 5983 else if (!cin_iscomment(theline) 5984 && (trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */ 5985 { 5986 int lead_start_len = 2; 5987 int lead_middle_len = 1; 5988 char_u lead_start[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* start-comment string */ 5989 char_u lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* middle-comment string */ 5990 char_u lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* end-comment string */ 5991 char_u *p; 5992 int start_align = 0; 5993 int start_off = 0; 5994 int done = FALSE; 5995 5996 /* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */ 5997 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL); 5998 amount = col; 5999 6000 p = curbuf->b_p_com; 6001 while (*p != NUL) 6002 { 6003 int align = 0; 6004 int off = 0; 6005 int what = 0; 6006 6007 while (*p != NUL && *p != ':') 6008 { 6009 if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_END || *p == COM_MIDDLE) 6010 what = *p++; 6011 else if (*p == COM_LEFT || *p == COM_RIGHT) 6012 align = *p++; 6013 else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-') 6014 off = getdigits(&p); 6015 else 6016 ++p; 6017 } 6018 6019 if (*p == ':') 6020 ++p; 6021 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ","); 6022 if (what == COM_START) 6023 { 6024 STRCPY(lead_start, lead_end); 6025 lead_start_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_start); 6026 start_off = off; 6027 start_align = align; 6028 } 6029 else if (what == COM_MIDDLE) 6030 { 6031 STRCPY(lead_middle, lead_end); 6032 lead_middle_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle); 6033 } 6034 else if (what == COM_END) 6035 { 6036 /* If our line starts with the middle comment string, line it 6037 * up with the comment opener per the 'comments' option. */ 6038 if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) == 0 6039 && STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) != 0) 6040 { 6041 done = TRUE; 6042 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1) 6043 { 6044 /* If the start comment string matches in the previous 6045 * line, use the indent of that line pluss offset. If 6046 * the middle comment string matches in the previous 6047 * line, use the indent of that line. XXX */ 6048 look = skipwhite(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1)); 6049 if (STRNCMP(look, lead_start, lead_start_len) == 0) 6050 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); 6051 else if (STRNCMP(look, lead_middle, 6052 lead_middle_len) == 0) 6053 { 6054 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); 6055 break; 6056 } 6057 /* If the start comment string doesn't match with the 6058 * start of the comment, skip this entry. XXX */ 6059 else if (STRNCMP(ml_get(trypos->lnum) + trypos->col, 6060 lead_start, lead_start_len) != 0) 6061 continue; 6062 } 6063 if (start_off != 0) 6064 amount += start_off; 6065 else if (start_align == COM_RIGHT) 6066 amount += vim_strsize(lead_start) 6067 - vim_strsize(lead_middle); 6068 break; 6069 } 6070 6071 /* If our line starts with the end comment string, line it up 6072 * with the middle comment */ 6073 if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) != 0 6074 && STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) == 0) 6075 { 6076 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); 6077 /* XXX */ 6078 if (off != 0) 6079 amount += off; 6080 else if (align == COM_RIGHT) 6081 amount += vim_strsize(lead_start) 6082 - vim_strsize(lead_middle); 6083 done = TRUE; 6084 break; 6085 } 6086 } 6087 } 6088 6089 /* If our line starts with an asterisk, line up with the 6090 * asterisk in the comment opener; otherwise, line up 6091 * with the first character of the comment text. 6092 */ 6093 if (done) 6094 ; 6095 else if (theline[0] == '*') 6096 amount += 1; 6097 else 6098 { 6099 /* 6100 * If we are more than one line away from the comment opener, take 6101 * the indent of the previous non-empty line. If 'cino' has "CO" 6102 * and we are just below the comment opener and there are any 6103 * white characters after it line up with the text after it; 6104 * otherwise, add the amount specified by "c" in 'cino' 6105 */ 6106 amount = -1; 6107 for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > trypos->lnum; --lnum) 6108 { 6109 if (linewhite(lnum)) /* skip blank lines */ 6110 continue; 6111 amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum); /* XXX */ 6112 break; 6113 } 6114 if (amount == -1) /* use the comment opener */ 6115 { 6116 if (!ind_in_comment2) 6117 { 6118 start = ml_get(trypos->lnum); 6119 look = start + trypos->col + 2; /* skip / and * */ 6120 if (*look != NUL) /* if something after it */ 6121 trypos->col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(look) - start); 6122 } 6123 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL); 6124 amount = col; 6125 if (ind_in_comment2 || *look == NUL) 6126 amount += ind_in_comment; 6127 } 6128 } 6129 } 6130 6131 /* 6132 * Are we inside parentheses or braces? 6133 */ /* XXX */ 6134 else if (((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)) != NULL 6135 && ind_java == 0) 6136 || (tryposBrace = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL 6137 || trypos != NULL) 6138 { 6139 if (trypos != NULL && tryposBrace != NULL) 6140 { 6141 /* Both an unmatched '(' and '{' is found. Use the one which is 6142 * closer to the current cursor position, set the other to NULL. */ 6143 if (trypos->lnum != tryposBrace->lnum 6144 ? trypos->lnum < tryposBrace->lnum 6145 : trypos->col < tryposBrace->col) 6146 trypos = NULL; 6147 else 6148 tryposBrace = NULL; 6149 } 6150 6151 if (trypos != NULL) 6152 { 6153 /* 6154 * If the matching paren is more than one line away, use the indent of 6155 * a previous non-empty line that matches the same paren. 6156 */ 6157 amount = -1; 6158 cur_amount = MAXCOL; 6159 our_paren_pos = *trypos; 6160 for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > our_paren_pos.lnum; --lnum) 6161 { 6162 l = skipwhite(ml_get(lnum)); 6163 if (cin_nocode(l)) /* skip comment lines */ 6164 continue; 6165 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &lnum)) /* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */ 6166 continue; 6167 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum; 6168 6169 /* Skip a comment. XXX */ 6170 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 6171 { 6172 lnum = trypos->lnum + 1; 6173 continue; 6174 } 6175 6176 /* XXX */ 6177 if ((trypos = find_match_paren( 6178 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos), 6179 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL 6180 && trypos->lnum == our_paren_pos.lnum 6181 && trypos->col == our_paren_pos.col) 6182 { 6183 amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum); /* XXX */ 6184 6185 if (theline[0] == ')') 6186 { 6187 if (our_paren_pos.lnum != lnum && cur_amount > amount) 6188 cur_amount = amount; 6189 amount = -1; 6190 } 6191 break; 6192 } 6193 } 6194 6195 /* 6196 * Line up with line where the matching paren is. XXX 6197 * If the line starts with a '(' or the indent for unclosed 6198 * parentheses is zero, line up with the unclosed parentheses. 6199 */ 6200 if (amount == -1) 6201 { 6202 amount = skip_label(our_paren_pos.lnum, &look, ind_maxcomment); 6203 if (theline[0] == ')' || ind_unclosed == 0 6204 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore && *skipwhite(look) == '(')) 6205 { 6206 /* 6207 * If we're looking at a close paren, line up right there; 6208 * otherwise, line up with the next (non-white) character. 6209 * When ind_unclosed_wrapped is set and the matching paren is 6210 * the last nonwhite character of the line, use either the 6211 * indent of the current line or the indentation of the next 6212 * outer paren and add ind_unclosed_wrapped (for very long 6213 * lines). 6214 */ 6215 if (theline[0] != ')') 6216 { 6217 cur_amount = MAXCOL; 6218 l = ml_get(our_paren_pos.lnum); 6219 if (ind_unclosed_wrapped 6220 && cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"(", NULL)) 6221 { 6222 /* look for opening unmatched paren, indent one level 6223 * for each additional level */ 6224 n = 1; 6225 for (col = 0; col < our_paren_pos.col; ++col) 6226 { 6227 switch (l[col]) 6228 { 6229 case '(': 6230 case '{': ++n; 6231 break; 6232 6233 case ')': 6234 case '}': if (n > 1) 6235 --n; 6236 break; 6237 } 6238 } 6239 6240 our_paren_pos.col = 0; 6241 amount += n * ind_unclosed_wrapped; 6242 } 6243 else if (ind_unclosed_whiteok) 6244 our_paren_pos.col++; 6245 else 6246 { 6247 col = our_paren_pos.col + 1; 6248 while (vim_iswhite(l[col])) 6249 col++; 6250 if (l[col] != NUL) /* In case of trailing space */ 6251 our_paren_pos.col = col; 6252 else 6253 our_paren_pos.col++; 6254 } 6255 } 6256 6257 /* 6258 * Find how indented the paren is, or the character after it 6259 * if we did the above "if". 6260 */ 6261 if (our_paren_pos.col > 0) 6262 { 6263 getvcol(curwin, &our_paren_pos, &col, NULL, NULL); 6264 if (cur_amount > (int)col) 6265 cur_amount = col; 6266 } 6267 } 6268 6269 if (theline[0] == ')' && ind_matching_paren) 6270 { 6271 /* Line up with the start of the matching paren line. */ 6272 } 6273 else if (ind_unclosed == 0 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore 6274 && *skipwhite(look) == '(')) 6275 { 6276 if (cur_amount != MAXCOL) 6277 amount = cur_amount; 6278 } 6279 else 6280 { 6281 /* add ind_unclosed2 for each '(' before our matching one */ 6282 col = our_paren_pos.col; 6283 while (our_paren_pos.col > 0) 6284 { 6285 --our_paren_pos.col; 6286 switch (*ml_get_pos(&our_paren_pos)) 6287 { 6288 case '(': amount += ind_unclosed2; 6289 col = our_paren_pos.col; 6290 break; 6291 case ')': amount -= ind_unclosed2; 6292 col = MAXCOL; 6293 break; 6294 } 6295 } 6296 6297 /* Use ind_unclosed once, when the first '(' is not inside 6298 * braces */ 6299 if (col == MAXCOL) 6300 amount += ind_unclosed; 6301 else 6302 { 6303 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = our_paren_pos.lnum; 6304 curwin->w_cursor.col = col; 6305 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 6306 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 6307 amount += ind_unclosed2; 6308 else 6309 amount += ind_unclosed; 6310 } 6311 /* 6312 * For a line starting with ')' use the minimum of the two 6313 * positions, to avoid giving it more indent than the previous 6314 * lines: 6315 * func_long_name( if (x 6316 * arg && yy 6317 * ) ^ not here ) ^ not here 6318 */ 6319 if (cur_amount < amount) 6320 amount = cur_amount; 6321 } 6322 } 6323 6324 /* add extra indent for a comment */ 6325 if (cin_iscomment(theline)) 6326 amount += ind_comment; 6327 } 6328 6329 /* 6330 * Are we at least inside braces, then? 6331 */ 6332 else 6333 { 6334 trypos = tryposBrace; 6335 6336 ourscope = trypos->lnum; 6337 start = ml_get(ourscope); 6338 6339 /* 6340 * Now figure out how indented the line is in general. 6341 * If the brace was at the start of the line, we use that; 6342 * otherwise, check out the indentation of the line as 6343 * a whole and then add the "imaginary indent" to that. 6344 */ 6345 look = skipwhite(start); 6346 if (*look == '{') 6347 { 6348 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL); 6349 amount = col; 6350 if (*start == '{') 6351 start_brace = BRACE_IN_COL0; 6352 else 6353 start_brace = BRACE_AT_START; 6354 } 6355 else 6356 { 6357 /* 6358 * that opening brace might have been on a continuation 6359 * line. if so, find the start of the line. 6360 */ 6361 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = ourscope; 6362 6363 /* 6364 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that 6365 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line. 6366 */ 6367 lnum = ourscope; 6368 if (find_last_paren(start, '(', ')') 6369 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 6370 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 6371 lnum = trypos->lnum; 6372 6373 /* 6374 * It could have been something like 6375 * case 1: if (asdf && 6376 * ldfd) { 6377 * } 6378 */ 6379 if (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(skipwhite(ml_get_curline()))) 6380 amount = get_indent(); 6381 else 6382 amount = skip_label(lnum, &l, ind_maxcomment); 6383 6384 start_brace = BRACE_AT_END; 6385 } 6386 6387 /* 6388 * if we're looking at a closing brace, that's where 6389 * we want to be. otherwise, add the amount of room 6390 * that an indent is supposed to be. 6391 */ 6392 if (theline[0] == '}') 6393 { 6394 /* 6395 * they may want closing braces to line up with something 6396 * other than the open brace. indulge them, if so. 6397 */ 6398 amount += ind_close_extra; 6399 } 6400 else 6401 { 6402 /* 6403 * If we're looking at an "else", try to find an "if" 6404 * to match it with. 6405 * If we're looking at a "while", try to find a "do" 6406 * to match it with. 6407 */ 6408 lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL; 6409 if (cin_iselse(theline)) 6410 lookfor = LOOKFOR_IF; 6411 else if (cin_iswhileofdo(theline, cur_curpos.lnum, ind_maxparen)) 6412 /* XXX */ 6413 lookfor = LOOKFOR_DO; 6414 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_INITIAL) 6415 { 6416 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = cur_curpos.lnum; 6417 if (find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen, 6418 ind_maxcomment) == OK) 6419 { 6420 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */ 6421 goto theend; 6422 } 6423 } 6424 6425 /* 6426 * We get here if we are not on an "while-of-do" or "else" (or 6427 * failed to find a matching "if"). 6428 * Search backwards for something to line up with. 6429 * First set amount for when we don't find anything. 6430 */ 6431 6432 /* 6433 * if the '{' is _really_ at the left margin, use the imaginary 6434 * location of a left-margin brace. Otherwise, correct the 6435 * location for ind_open_extra. 6436 */ 6437 6438 if (start_brace == BRACE_IN_COL0) /* '{' is in column 0 */ 6439 { 6440 amount = ind_open_left_imag; 6441 } 6442 else 6443 { 6444 if (start_brace == BRACE_AT_END) /* '{' is at end of line */ 6445 amount += ind_open_imag; 6446 else 6447 { 6448 /* Compensate for adding ind_open_extra later. */ 6449 amount -= ind_open_extra; 6450 if (amount < 0) 6451 amount = 0; 6452 } 6453 } 6454 6455 lookfor_break = FALSE; 6456 6457 if (cin_iscase(theline)) /* it's a switch() label */ 6458 { 6459 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CASE; /* find a previous switch() label */ 6460 amount += ind_case; 6461 } 6462 else if (cin_isscopedecl(theline)) /* private:, ... */ 6463 { 6464 lookfor = LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL; /* class decl is this block */ 6465 amount += ind_scopedecl; 6466 } 6467 else 6468 { 6469 if (ind_case_break && cin_isbreak(theline)) /* break; ... */ 6470 lookfor_break = TRUE; 6471 6472 lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL; 6473 amount += ind_level; /* ind_level from start of block */ 6474 } 6475 scope_amount = amount; 6476 whilelevel = 0; 6477 6478 /* 6479 * Search backwards. If we find something we recognize, line up 6480 * with that. 6481 * 6482 * if we're looking at an open brace, indent 6483 * the usual amount relative to the conditional 6484 * that opens the block. 6485 */ 6486 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos; 6487 for (;;) 6488 { 6489 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--; 6490 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 6491 6492 /* 6493 * If we went all the way back to the start of our scope, line 6494 * up with it. 6495 */ 6496 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum <= ourscope) 6497 { 6498 /* we reached end of scope: 6499 * if looking for a enum or structure initialization 6500 * go further back: 6501 * if it is an initializer (enum xxx or xxx =), then 6502 * don't add ind_continuation, otherwise it is a variable 6503 * declaration: 6504 * int x, 6505 * here; <-- add ind_continuation 6506 */ 6507 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT) 6508 { 6509 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum == 0 6510 || curwin->w_cursor.lnum 6511 < ourscope - ind_maxparen) 6512 { 6513 /* nothing found (abuse ind_maxparen as limit) 6514 * assume terminated line (i.e. a variable 6515 * initialization) */ 6516 if (cont_amount > 0) 6517 amount = cont_amount; 6518 else 6519 amount += ind_continuation; 6520 break; 6521 } 6522 6523 l = ml_get_curline(); 6524 6525 /* 6526 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the 6527 * comment. 6528 */ 6529 trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment); 6530 if (trypos != NULL) 6531 { 6532 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1; 6533 continue; 6534 } 6535 6536 /* 6537 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines. 6538 */ 6539 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum)) 6540 continue; 6541 6542 if (cin_nocode(l)) 6543 continue; 6544 6545 terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE); 6546 6547 /* 6548 * If we are at top level and the line looks like a 6549 * function declaration, we are done 6550 * (it's a variable declaration). 6551 */ 6552 if (start_brace != BRACE_IN_COL0 6553 || !cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum)) 6554 { 6555 /* if the line is terminated with another ',' 6556 * it is a continued variable initialization. 6557 * don't add extra indent. 6558 * TODO: does not work, if a function 6559 * declaration is split over multiple lines: 6560 * cin_isfuncdecl returns FALSE then. 6561 */ 6562 if (terminated == ',') 6563 break; 6564 6565 /* if it es a enum declaration or an assignment, 6566 * we are done. 6567 */ 6568 if (terminated != ';' && cin_isinit()) 6569 break; 6570 6571 /* nothing useful found */ 6572 if (terminated == 0 || terminated == '{') 6573 continue; 6574 } 6575 6576 if (terminated != ';') 6577 { 6578 /* Skip parens and braces. Position the cursor 6579 * over the rightmost paren, so that matching it 6580 * will take us back to the start of the line. 6581 */ /* XXX */ 6582 trypos = NULL; 6583 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')) 6584 trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 6585 ind_maxcomment); 6586 6587 if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}')) 6588 trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment); 6589 6590 if (trypos != NULL) 6591 { 6592 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1; 6593 continue; 6594 } 6595 } 6596 6597 /* it's a variable declaration, add indentation 6598 * like in 6599 * int a, 6600 * b; 6601 */ 6602 if (cont_amount > 0) 6603 amount = cont_amount; 6604 else 6605 amount += ind_continuation; 6606 } 6607 else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM) 6608 { 6609 if (cont_amount > 0) 6610 amount = cont_amount; 6611 else 6612 amount += ind_continuation; 6613 } 6614 else if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM 6615 && lookfor != LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS) 6616 { 6617 amount = scope_amount; 6618 if (theline[0] == '{') 6619 amount += ind_open_extra; 6620 } 6621 break; 6622 } 6623 6624 /* 6625 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment. 6626 */ /* XXX */ 6627 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 6628 { 6629 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1; 6630 continue; 6631 } 6632 6633 l = ml_get_curline(); 6634 6635 /* 6636 * If this is a switch() label, may line up relative to that. 6637 * if this is a C++ scope declaration, do the same. 6638 */ 6639 iscase = cin_iscase(l); 6640 if (iscase || cin_isscopedecl(l)) 6641 { 6642 /* we are only looking for cpp base class 6643 * declaration/initialization any longer */ 6644 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS) 6645 break; 6646 6647 /* When looking for a "do" we are not interested in 6648 * labels. */ 6649 if (whilelevel > 0) 6650 continue; 6651 6652 /* 6653 * case xx: 6654 * c = 99 + <- this indent plus continuation 6655 *-> here; 6656 */ 6657 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM 6658 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT) 6659 { 6660 if (cont_amount > 0) 6661 amount = cont_amount; 6662 else 6663 amount += ind_continuation; 6664 break; 6665 } 6666 6667 /* 6668 * case xx: <- line up with this case 6669 * x = 333; 6670 * case yy: 6671 */ 6672 if ( (iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE) 6673 || (iscase && lookfor_break) 6674 || (!iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL)) 6675 { 6676 /* 6677 * Check that this case label is not for another 6678 * switch() 6679 */ /* XXX */ 6680 if ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) == 6681 NULL || trypos->lnum == ourscope) 6682 { 6683 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */ 6684 break; 6685 } 6686 continue; 6687 } 6688 6689 n = get_indent_nolabel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum); /* XXX */ 6690 6691 /* 6692 * case xx: if (cond) <- line up with this if 6693 * y = y + 1; 6694 * -> s = 99; 6695 * 6696 * case xx: 6697 * if (cond) <- line up with this line 6698 * y = y + 1; 6699 * -> s = 99; 6700 */ 6701 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM) 6702 { 6703 if (n) 6704 amount = n; 6705 6706 if (!lookfor_break) 6707 break; 6708 } 6709 6710 /* 6711 * case xx: x = x + 1; <- line up with this x 6712 * -> y = y + 1; 6713 * 6714 * case xx: if (cond) <- line up with this if 6715 * -> y = y + 1; 6716 */ 6717 if (n) 6718 { 6719 amount = n; 6720 l = after_label(ml_get_curline()); 6721 if (l != NULL && cin_is_cinword(l)) 6722 amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace; 6723 break; 6724 } 6725 6726 /* 6727 * Try to get the indent of a statement before the switch 6728 * label. If nothing is found, line up relative to the 6729 * switch label. 6730 * break; <- may line up with this line 6731 * case xx: 6732 * -> y = 1; 6733 */ 6734 scope_amount = get_indent() + (iscase /* XXX */ 6735 ? ind_case_code : ind_scopedecl_code); 6736 lookfor = ind_case_break ? LOOKFOR_NOBREAK : LOOKFOR_ANY; 6737 continue; 6738 } 6739 6740 /* 6741 * Looking for a switch() label or C++ scope declaration, 6742 * ignore other lines, skip {}-blocks. 6743 */ 6744 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE || lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL) 6745 { 6746 if (find_last_paren(l, '{', '}') && (trypos = 6747 find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 6748 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1; 6749 continue; 6750 } 6751 6752 /* 6753 * Ignore jump labels with nothing after them. 6754 */ 6755 if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)) 6756 { 6757 l = after_label(ml_get_curline()); 6758 if (l == NULL || cin_nocode(l)) 6759 continue; 6760 } 6761 6762 /* 6763 * Ignore #defines, #if, etc. 6764 * Ignore comment and empty lines. 6765 * (need to get the line again, cin_islabel() may have 6766 * unlocked it) 6767 */ 6768 l = ml_get_curline(); 6769 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum) 6770 || cin_nocode(l)) 6771 continue; 6772 6773 /* 6774 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or 6775 * constructor initialization? 6776 */ /* XXX */ 6777 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM && ind_cpp_baseclass 6778 && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col)) 6779 { 6780 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM) 6781 { 6782 if (cont_amount > 0) 6783 amount = cont_amount; 6784 else 6785 amount += ind_continuation; 6786 } 6787 else if (col == 0 || theline[0] == '{') 6788 { 6789 amount = get_indent(); 6790 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')') 6791 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 6792 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 6793 amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum); /* XXX */ 6794 if (theline[0] != '{') 6795 amount += ind_cpp_baseclass; 6796 } 6797 else 6798 { 6799 curwin->w_cursor.col = col; 6800 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL); 6801 amount = (int)col; 6802 } 6803 break; 6804 } 6805 else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS) 6806 { 6807 /* only look, whether there is a cpp base class 6808 * declaration or initialization before the opening brace. */ 6809 if (cin_isterminated(l, TRUE, FALSE)) 6810 break; 6811 else 6812 continue; 6813 } 6814 6815 /* 6816 * What happens next depends on the line being terminated. 6817 * If terminated with a ',' only consider it terminating if 6818 * there is anoter unterminated statement behind, eg: 6819 * 123, 6820 * sizeof 6821 * here 6822 * Otherwise check whether it is a enumeration or structure 6823 * initialisation (not indented) or a variable declaration 6824 * (indented). 6825 */ 6826 terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE); 6827 6828 if (terminated == 0 || (lookfor != LOOKFOR_UNTERM 6829 && terminated == ',')) 6830 { 6831 /* 6832 * if we're in the middle of a paren thing, 6833 * go back to the line that starts it so 6834 * we can get the right prevailing indent 6835 * if ( foo && 6836 * bar ) 6837 */ 6838 /* 6839 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that 6840 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line. 6841 */ 6842 (void)find_last_paren(l, '(', ')'); 6843 trypos = find_match_paren( 6844 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos), 6845 ind_maxcomment); 6846 6847 /* 6848 * If we are looking for ',', we also look for matching 6849 * braces. 6850 */ 6851 if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}')) 6852 trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment); 6853 6854 if (trypos != NULL) 6855 { 6856 /* 6857 * Check if we are on a case label now. This is 6858 * handled above. 6859 * case xx: if ( asdf && 6860 * asdf) 6861 */ 6862 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum; 6863 l = ml_get_curline(); 6864 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l)) 6865 { 6866 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 6867 continue; 6868 } 6869 } 6870 6871 /* 6872 * Skip over continuation lines to find the one to get the 6873 * indent from 6874 * char *usethis = "bla\ 6875 * bla", 6876 * here; 6877 */ 6878 if (terminated == ',') 6879 { 6880 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1) 6881 { 6882 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); 6883 if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\') 6884 break; 6885 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 6886 } 6887 } 6888 6889 /* 6890 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line, 6891 * ignoring any jump label. XXX 6892 */ 6893 cur_amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 6894 &l, ind_maxcomment); 6895 6896 /* 6897 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, and it 6898 * starts with a '{', line it up with this line. 6899 * while (not) 6900 * -> { 6901 * } 6902 */ 6903 if (terminated != ',' && lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM 6904 && theline[0] == '{') 6905 { 6906 amount = cur_amount; 6907 /* 6908 * Only add ind_open_extra when the current line 6909 * doesn't start with a '{', which must have a match 6910 * in the same line (scope is the same). Probably: 6911 * { 1, 2 }, 6912 * -> { 3, 4 } 6913 */ 6914 if (*skipwhite(l) != '{') 6915 amount += ind_open_extra; 6916 6917 if (ind_cpp_baseclass) 6918 { 6919 /* have to look back, whether it is a cpp base 6920 * class declaration or initialization */ 6921 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS; 6922 continue; 6923 } 6924 break; 6925 } 6926 6927 /* 6928 * Check if we are after an "if", "while", etc. 6929 * Also allow " } else". 6930 */ 6931 if (cin_is_cinword(l) || cin_iselse(skipwhite(l))) 6932 { 6933 /* 6934 * Found an unterminated line after an if (), line up 6935 * with the last one. 6936 * if (cond) 6937 * 100 + 6938 * -> here; 6939 */ 6940 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM 6941 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT) 6942 { 6943 if (cont_amount > 0) 6944 amount = cont_amount; 6945 else 6946 amount += ind_continuation; 6947 break; 6948 } 6949 6950 /* 6951 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, we 6952 * are finished. 6953 * while (not) 6954 * -> here; 6955 * Otherwise this indent can be used when the line 6956 * before this is terminated. 6957 * yyy; 6958 * if (stat) 6959 * while (not) 6960 * xxx; 6961 * -> here; 6962 */ 6963 amount = cur_amount; 6964 if (theline[0] == '{') 6965 amount += ind_open_extra; 6966 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM) 6967 { 6968 amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace; 6969 break; 6970 } 6971 6972 /* 6973 * Special trick: when expecting the while () after a 6974 * do, line up with the while() 6975 * do 6976 * x = 1; 6977 * -> here 6978 */ 6979 l = skipwhite(ml_get_curline()); 6980 if (cin_isdo(l)) 6981 { 6982 if (whilelevel == 0) 6983 break; 6984 --whilelevel; 6985 } 6986 6987 /* 6988 * When searching for a terminated line, don't use the 6989 * one between the "if" and the "else". 6990 * Need to use the scope of this "else". XXX 6991 * If whilelevel != 0 continue looking for a "do {". 6992 */ 6993 if (cin_iselse(l) 6994 && whilelevel == 0 6995 && ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) 6996 == NULL 6997 || find_match(LOOKFOR_IF, trypos->lnum, 6998 ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) == FAIL)) 6999 break; 7000 } 7001 7002 /* 7003 * If we're below an unterminated line that is not an 7004 * "if" or something, we may line up with this line or 7005 * add someting for a continuation line, depending on 7006 * the line before this one. 7007 */ 7008 else 7009 { 7010 /* 7011 * Found two unterminated lines on a row, line up with 7012 * the last one. 7013 * c = 99 + 7014 * 100 + 7015 * -> here; 7016 */ 7017 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM) 7018 { 7019 /* When line ends in a comma add extra indent */ 7020 if (terminated == ',') 7021 amount += ind_continuation; 7022 break; 7023 } 7024 7025 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT) 7026 { 7027 /* Found two lines ending in ',', lineup with the 7028 * lowest one, but check for cpp base class 7029 * declaration/initialization, if it is an 7030 * opening brace or we are looking just for 7031 * enumerations/initializations. */ 7032 if (terminated == ',') 7033 { 7034 if (ind_cpp_baseclass == 0) 7035 break; 7036 7037 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS; 7038 continue; 7039 } 7040 7041 /* Ignore unterminated lines in between, but 7042 * reduce indent. */ 7043 if (amount > cur_amount) 7044 amount = cur_amount; 7045 } 7046 else 7047 { 7048 /* 7049 * Found first unterminated line on a row, may 7050 * line up with this line, remember its indent 7051 * 100 + 7052 * -> here; 7053 */ 7054 amount = cur_amount; 7055 7056 /* 7057 * If previous line ends in ',', check whether we 7058 * are in an initialization or enum 7059 * struct xxx = 7060 * { 7061 * sizeof a, 7062 * 124 }; 7063 * or a normal possible continuation line. 7064 * but only, of no other statement has been found 7065 * yet. 7066 */ 7067 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL && terminated == ',') 7068 { 7069 lookfor = LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT; 7070 cont_amount = cin_first_id_amount(); 7071 } 7072 else 7073 { 7074 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL 7075 && *l != NUL 7076 && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\') 7077 /* XXX */ 7078 cont_amount = cin_get_equal_amount( 7079 curwin->w_cursor.lnum); 7080 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM) 7081 lookfor = LOOKFOR_UNTERM; 7082 } 7083 } 7084 } 7085 } 7086 7087 /* 7088 * Check if we are after a while (cond); 7089 * If so: Ignore until the matching "do". 7090 */ 7091 /* XXX */ 7092 else if (cin_iswhileofdo(l, 7093 curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen)) 7094 { 7095 /* 7096 * Found an unterminated line after a while ();, line up 7097 * with the last one. 7098 * while (cond); 7099 * 100 + <- line up with this one 7100 * -> here; 7101 */ 7102 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM 7103 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT) 7104 { 7105 if (cont_amount > 0) 7106 amount = cont_amount; 7107 else 7108 amount += ind_continuation; 7109 break; 7110 } 7111 7112 if (whilelevel == 0) 7113 { 7114 lookfor = LOOKFOR_TERM; 7115 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */ 7116 if (theline[0] == '{') 7117 amount += ind_open_extra; 7118 } 7119 ++whilelevel; 7120 } 7121 7122 /* 7123 * We are after a "normal" statement. 7124 * If we had another statement we can stop now and use the 7125 * indent of that other statement. 7126 * Otherwise the indent of the current statement may be used, 7127 * search backwards for the next "normal" statement. 7128 */ 7129 else 7130 { 7131 /* 7132 * Skip single break line, if before a switch label. It 7133 * may be lined up with the case label. 7134 */ 7135 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_NOBREAK 7136 && cin_isbreak(skipwhite(ml_get_curline()))) 7137 { 7138 lookfor = LOOKFOR_ANY; 7139 continue; 7140 } 7141 7142 /* 7143 * Handle "do {" line. 7144 */ 7145 if (whilelevel > 0) 7146 { 7147 l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 7148 if (cin_isdo(l)) 7149 { 7150 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */ 7151 --whilelevel; 7152 continue; 7153 } 7154 } 7155 7156 /* 7157 * Found a terminated line above an unterminated line. Add 7158 * the amount for a continuation line. 7159 * x = 1; 7160 * y = foo + 7161 * -> here; 7162 * or 7163 * int x = 1; 7164 * int foo, 7165 * -> here; 7166 */ 7167 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM 7168 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT) 7169 { 7170 if (cont_amount > 0) 7171 amount = cont_amount; 7172 else 7173 amount += ind_continuation; 7174 break; 7175 } 7176 7177 /* 7178 * Found a terminated line above a terminated line or "if" 7179 * etc. line. Use the amount of the line below us. 7180 * x = 1; x = 1; 7181 * if (asdf) y = 2; 7182 * while (asdf) ->here; 7183 * here; 7184 * ->foo; 7185 */ 7186 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM) 7187 { 7188 if (!lookfor_break && whilelevel == 0) 7189 break; 7190 } 7191 7192 /* 7193 * First line above the one we're indenting is terminated. 7194 * To know what needs to be done look further backward for 7195 * a terminated line. 7196 */ 7197 else 7198 { 7199 /* 7200 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so 7201 * that matching it will take us back to the start of 7202 * the line. Helps for: 7203 * func(asdr, 7204 * asdfasdf); 7205 * here; 7206 */ 7207 term_again: 7208 l = ml_get_curline(); 7209 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')') 7210 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 7211 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 7212 { 7213 /* 7214 * Check if we are on a case label now. This is 7215 * handled above. 7216 * case xx: if ( asdf && 7217 * asdf) 7218 */ 7219 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum; 7220 l = ml_get_curline(); 7221 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l)) 7222 { 7223 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 7224 continue; 7225 } 7226 } 7227 7228 /* When aligning with the case statement, don't align 7229 * with a statement after it. 7230 * case 1: { <-- don't use this { position 7231 * stat; 7232 * } 7233 * case 2: 7234 * stat; 7235 * } 7236 */ 7237 iscase = (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(l)); 7238 7239 /* 7240 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line, 7241 * ignoring any jump label. 7242 */ 7243 amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 7244 &l, ind_maxcomment); 7245 7246 if (theline[0] == '{') 7247 amount += ind_open_extra; 7248 /* See remark above: "Only add ind_open_extra.." */ 7249 if (*skipwhite(l) == '{') 7250 amount -= ind_open_extra; 7251 lookfor = iscase ? LOOKFOR_ANY : LOOKFOR_TERM; 7252 7253 /* 7254 * If we're at the end of a block, skip to the start of 7255 * that block. 7256 */ 7257 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 7258 if (*cin_skipcomment(l) == '}' 7259 && (trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) 7260 != NULL) /* XXX */ 7261 { 7262 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum; 7263 /* if not "else {" check for terminated again */ 7264 /* but skip block for "} else {" */ 7265 l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 7266 if (*l == '}' || !cin_iselse(l)) 7267 goto term_again; 7268 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 7269 } 7270 } 7271 } 7272 } 7273 } 7274 } 7275 7276 /* add extra indent for a comment */ 7277 if (cin_iscomment(theline)) 7278 amount += ind_comment; 7279 } 7280 7281 /* 7282 * ok -- we're not inside any sort of structure at all! 7283 * 7284 * this means we're at the top level, and everything should 7285 * basically just match where the previous line is, except 7286 * for the lines immediately following a function declaration, 7287 * which are K&R-style parameters and need to be indented. 7288 */ 7289 else 7290 { 7291 /* 7292 * if our line starts with an open brace, forget about any 7293 * prevailing indent and make sure it looks like the start 7294 * of a function 7295 */ 7296 7297 if (theline[0] == '{') 7298 { 7299 amount = ind_first_open; 7300 } 7301 7302 /* 7303 * If the NEXT line is a function declaration, the current 7304 * line needs to be indented as a function type spec. 7305 * Don't do this if the current line looks like a comment 7306 * or if the current line is terminated, ie. ends in ';'. 7307 */ 7308 else if (cur_curpos.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count 7309 && !cin_nocode(theline) 7310 && !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)":", NULL) 7311 && !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)",", NULL) 7312 && cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum + 1) 7313 && !cin_isterminated(theline, FALSE, TRUE)) 7314 { 7315 amount = ind_func_type; 7316 } 7317 else 7318 { 7319 amount = 0; 7320 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos; 7321 7322 /* search backwards until we find something we recognize */ 7323 7324 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1) 7325 { 7326 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--; 7327 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 7328 7329 l = ml_get_curline(); 7330 7331 /* 7332 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment. 7333 */ /* XXX */ 7334 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 7335 { 7336 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1; 7337 continue; 7338 } 7339 7340 /* 7341 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or constructor 7342 * initialization? 7343 */ /* XXX */ 7344 if (ind_cpp_baseclass != 0 && theline[0] != '{' 7345 && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col)) 7346 { 7347 if (col == 0) 7348 { 7349 amount = get_indent() + ind_cpp_baseclass; /* XXX */ 7350 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')') 7351 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 7352 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 7353 amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum) 7354 + ind_cpp_baseclass; /* XXX */ 7355 } 7356 else 7357 { 7358 curwin->w_cursor.col = col; 7359 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL); 7360 amount = (int)col; 7361 } 7362 break; 7363 } 7364 7365 /* 7366 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines. 7367 */ 7368 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum)) 7369 continue; 7370 7371 if (cin_nocode(l)) 7372 continue; 7373 7374 /* 7375 * If the previous line ends in ',', use one level of 7376 * indentation: 7377 * int foo, 7378 * bar; 7379 * do this before checking for '}' in case of eg. 7380 * enum foobar 7381 * { 7382 * ... 7383 * } foo, 7384 * bar; 7385 */ 7386 n = 0; 7387 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL) 7388 || (*l != NUL && (n = l[STRLEN(l) - 1]) == '\\')) 7389 { 7390 /* take us back to opening paren */ 7391 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')') 7392 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 7393 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 7394 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum; 7395 7396 /* For a line ending in ',' that is a continuation line go 7397 * back to the first line with a backslash: 7398 * char *foo = "bla\ 7399 * bla", 7400 * here; 7401 */ 7402 while (n == 0 && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1) 7403 { 7404 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); 7405 if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\') 7406 break; 7407 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 7408 } 7409 7410 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */ 7411 7412 if (amount == 0) 7413 amount = cin_first_id_amount(); 7414 if (amount == 0) 7415 amount = ind_continuation; 7416 break; 7417 } 7418 7419 /* 7420 * If the line looks like a function declaration, and we're 7421 * not in a comment, put it the left margin. 7422 */ 7423 if (cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum)) /* XXX */ 7424 break; 7425 l = ml_get_curline(); 7426 7427 /* 7428 * Finding the closing '}' of a previous function. Put 7429 * current line at the left margin. For when 'cino' has "fs". 7430 */ 7431 if (*skipwhite(l) == '}') 7432 break; 7433 7434 /* (matching {) 7435 * If the previous line ends on '};' (maybe followed by 7436 * comments) align at column 0. For example: 7437 * char *string_array[] = { "foo", 7438 * / * x * / "b};ar" }; / * foobar * / 7439 */ 7440 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"};", NULL)) 7441 break; 7442 7443 /* 7444 * If the PREVIOUS line is a function declaration, the current 7445 * line (and the ones that follow) needs to be indented as 7446 * parameters. 7447 */ 7448 if (cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum)) 7449 { 7450 amount = ind_param; 7451 break; 7452 } 7453 7454 /* 7455 * If the previous line ends in ';' and the line before the 7456 * previous line ends in ',' or '\', ident to column zero: 7457 * int foo, 7458 * bar; 7459 * indent_to_0 here; 7460 */ 7461 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u*)";", NULL)) 7462 { 7463 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); 7464 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL) 7465 || (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')) 7466 break; 7467 l = ml_get_curline(); 7468 } 7469 7470 /* 7471 * Doesn't look like anything interesting -- so just 7472 * use the indent of this line. 7473 * 7474 * Position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that 7475 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line. 7476 */ 7477 find_last_paren(l, '(', ')'); 7478 7479 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 7480 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 7481 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum; 7482 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */ 7483 break; 7484 } 7485 7486 /* add extra indent for a comment */ 7487 if (cin_iscomment(theline)) 7488 amount += ind_comment; 7489 7490 /* add extra indent if the previous line ended in a backslash: 7491 * "asdfasdf\ 7492 * here"; 7493 * char *foo = "asdf\ 7494 * here"; 7495 */ 7496 if (cur_curpos.lnum > 1) 7497 { 7498 l = ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum - 1); 7499 if (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\') 7500 { 7501 cur_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(cur_curpos.lnum - 1); 7502 if (cur_amount > 0) 7503 amount = cur_amount; 7504 else if (cur_amount == 0) 7505 amount += ind_continuation; 7506 } 7507 } 7508 } 7509 } 7510 7511 theend: 7512 /* put the cursor back where it belongs */ 7513 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos; 7514 7515 vim_free(linecopy); 7516 7517 if (amount < 0) 7518 return 0; 7519 return amount; 7520 } 7521 7522 static int 7523 find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) 7524 int lookfor; 7525 linenr_T ourscope; 7526 int ind_maxparen; 7527 int ind_maxcomment; 7528 { 7529 char_u *look; 7530 pos_T *theirscope; 7531 char_u *mightbeif; 7532 int elselevel; 7533 int whilelevel; 7534 7535 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF) 7536 { 7537 elselevel = 1; 7538 whilelevel = 0; 7539 } 7540 else 7541 { 7542 elselevel = 0; 7543 whilelevel = 1; 7544 } 7545 7546 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 7547 7548 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > ourscope + 1) 7549 { 7550 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--; 7551 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 7552 7553 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 7554 if (cin_iselse(look) 7555 || cin_isif(look) 7556 || cin_isdo(look) /* XXX */ 7557 || cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen)) 7558 { 7559 /* 7560 * if we've gone outside the braces entirely, 7561 * we must be out of scope... 7562 */ 7563 theirscope = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment); /* XXX */ 7564 if (theirscope == NULL) 7565 break; 7566 7567 /* 7568 * and if the brace enclosing this is further 7569 * back than the one enclosing the else, we're 7570 * out of luck too. 7571 */ 7572 if (theirscope->lnum < ourscope) 7573 break; 7574 7575 /* 7576 * and if they're enclosed in a *deeper* brace, 7577 * then we can ignore it because it's in a 7578 * different scope... 7579 */ 7580 if (theirscope->lnum > ourscope) 7581 continue; 7582 7583 /* 7584 * if it was an "else" (that's not an "else if") 7585 * then we need to go back to another if, so 7586 * increment elselevel 7587 */ 7588 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 7589 if (cin_iselse(look)) 7590 { 7591 mightbeif = cin_skipcomment(look + 4); 7592 if (!cin_isif(mightbeif)) 7593 ++elselevel; 7594 continue; 7595 } 7596 7597 /* 7598 * if it was a "while" then we need to go back to 7599 * another "do", so increment whilelevel. XXX 7600 */ 7601 if (cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen)) 7602 { 7603 ++whilelevel; 7604 continue; 7605 } 7606 7607 /* If it's an "if" decrement elselevel */ 7608 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 7609 if (cin_isif(look)) 7610 { 7611 elselevel--; 7612 /* 7613 * When looking for an "if" ignore "while"s that 7614 * get in the way. 7615 */ 7616 if (elselevel == 0 && lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF) 7617 whilelevel = 0; 7618 } 7619 7620 /* If it's a "do" decrement whilelevel */ 7621 if (cin_isdo(look)) 7622 whilelevel--; 7623 7624 /* 7625 * if we've used up all the elses, then 7626 * this must be the if that we want! 7627 * match the indent level of that if. 7628 */ 7629 if (elselevel <= 0 && whilelevel <= 0) 7630 { 7631 return OK; 7632 } 7633 } 7634 } 7635 return FAIL; 7636 } 7637 7638 # if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO) 7639 /* 7640 * Get indent level from 'indentexpr'. 7641 */ 7642 int 7643 get_expr_indent() 7644 { 7645 int indent; 7646 pos_T pos; 7647 int save_State; 7648 7649 pos = curwin->w_cursor; 7650 set_vim_var_nr(VV_LNUM, curwin->w_cursor.lnum); 7651 ++sandbox; 7652 indent = eval_to_number(curbuf->b_p_inde); 7653 --sandbox; 7654 7655 /* Restore the cursor position so that 'indentexpr' doesn't need to. 7656 * Pretend to be in Insert mode, allow cursor past end of line for "o" 7657 * command. */ 7658 save_State = State; 7659 State = INSERT; 7660 curwin->w_cursor = pos; 7661 check_cursor(); 7662 State = save_State; 7663 7664 /* If there is an error, just keep the current indent. */ 7665 if (indent < 0) 7666 indent = get_indent(); 7667 7668 return indent; 7669 } 7670 # endif 7671 7672 #endif /* FEAT_CINDENT */ 7673 7674 #if defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(PROTO) 7675 7676 static int lisp_match __ARGS((char_u *p)); 7677 7678 static int 7679 lisp_match(p) 7680 char_u *p; 7681 { 7682 char_u buf[LSIZE]; 7683 int len; 7684 char_u *word = p_lispwords; 7685 7686 while (*word != NUL) 7687 { 7688 (void)copy_option_part(&word, buf, LSIZE, ","); 7689 len = (int)STRLEN(buf); 7690 if (STRNCMP(buf, p, len) == 0 && p[len] == ' ') 7691 return TRUE; 7692 } 7693 return FALSE; 7694 } 7695 7696 /* 7697 * When 'p' is present in 'cpoptions, a Vi compatible method is used. 7698 * The incompatible newer method is quite a bit better at indenting 7699 * code in lisp-like languages than the traditional one; it's still 7700 * mostly heuristics however -- Dirk van Deun, [email protected] 7701 * 7702 * TODO: 7703 * Findmatch() should be adapted for lisp, also to make showmatch 7704 * work correctly: now (v5.3) it seems all C/C++ oriented: 7705 * - it does not recognize the #\( and #\) notations as character literals 7706 * - it doesn't know about comments starting with a semicolon 7707 * - it incorrectly interprets '(' as a character literal 7708 * All this messes up get_lisp_indent in some rare cases. 7709 * Update from Sergey Khorev: 7710 * I tried to fix the first two issues. 7711 */ 7712 int 7713 get_lisp_indent() 7714 { 7715 pos_T *pos, realpos, paren; 7716 int amount; 7717 char_u *that; 7718 colnr_T col; 7719 colnr_T firsttry; 7720 int parencount, quotecount; 7721 int vi_lisp; 7722 7723 /* Set vi_lisp to use the vi-compatible method */ 7724 vi_lisp = (vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISP) != NULL); 7725 7726 realpos = curwin->w_cursor; 7727 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 7728 7729 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) == NULL) 7730 pos = findmatch(NULL, '['); 7731 else 7732 { 7733 paren = *pos; 7734 pos = findmatch(NULL, '['); 7735 if (pos == NULL || ltp(pos, &paren)) 7736 pos = &paren; 7737 } 7738 if (pos != NULL) 7739 { 7740 /* Extra trick: Take the indent of the first previous non-white 7741 * line that is at the same () level. */ 7742 amount = -1; 7743 parencount = 0; 7744 7745 while (--curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= pos->lnum) 7746 { 7747 if (linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum)) 7748 continue; 7749 for (that = ml_get_curline(); *that != NUL; ++that) 7750 { 7751 if (*that == ';') 7752 { 7753 while (*(that + 1) != NUL) 7754 ++that; 7755 continue; 7756 } 7757 if (*that == '\\') 7758 { 7759 if (*(that + 1) != NUL) 7760 ++that; 7761 continue; 7762 } 7763 if (*that == '"' && *(that + 1) != NUL) 7764 { 7765 that++; 7766 while (*that && (*that != '"' || *(that - 1) == '\\')) 7767 ++that; 7768 } 7769 if (*that == '(' || *that == '[') 7770 ++parencount; 7771 else if (*that == ')' || *that == ']') 7772 --parencount; 7773 } 7774 if (parencount == 0) 7775 { 7776 amount = get_indent(); 7777 break; 7778 } 7779 } 7780 7781 if (amount == -1) 7782 { 7783 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum; 7784 curwin->w_cursor.col = pos->col; 7785 col = pos->col; 7786 7787 that = ml_get_curline(); 7788 7789 if (vi_lisp && get_indent() == 0) 7790 amount = 2; 7791 else 7792 { 7793 amount = 0; 7794 while (*that && col) 7795 { 7796 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, (colnr_T)amount); 7797 col--; 7798 } 7799 7800 /* 7801 * Some keywords require "body" indenting rules (the 7802 * non-standard-lisp ones are Scheme special forms): 7803 * 7804 * (let ((a 1)) instead (let ((a 1)) 7805 * (...)) of (...)) 7806 */ 7807 7808 if (!vi_lisp && (*that == '(' || *that == '[') 7809 && lisp_match(that + 1)) 7810 amount += 2; 7811 else 7812 { 7813 that++; 7814 amount++; 7815 firsttry = amount; 7816 7817 while (vim_iswhite(*that)) 7818 { 7819 amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount); 7820 ++that; 7821 } 7822 7823 if (*that && *that != ';') /* not a comment line */ 7824 { 7825 /* test *that != '(' to accomodate first let/do 7826 * argument if it is more than one line */ 7827 if (!vi_lisp && *that != '(' && *that != '[') 7828 firsttry++; 7829 7830 parencount = 0; 7831 quotecount = 0; 7832 7833 if (vi_lisp 7834 || (*that != '"' 7835 && *that != '\'' 7836 && *that != '#' 7837 && (*that < '0' || *that > '9'))) 7838 { 7839 while (*that 7840 && (!vim_iswhite(*that) 7841 || quotecount 7842 || parencount) 7843 && (!((*that == '(' || *that == '[') 7844 && !quotecount 7845 && !parencount 7846 && vi_lisp))) 7847 { 7848 if (*that == '"') 7849 quotecount = !quotecount; 7850 if ((*that == '(' || *that == '[') 7851 && !quotecount) 7852 ++parencount; 7853 if ((*that == ')' || *that == ']') 7854 && !quotecount) 7855 --parencount; 7856 if (*that == '\\' && *(that+1) != NUL) 7857 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, 7858 (colnr_T)amount); 7859 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, 7860 (colnr_T)amount); 7861 } 7862 } 7863 while (vim_iswhite(*that)) 7864 { 7865 amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount); 7866 that++; 7867 } 7868 if (!*that || *that == ';') 7869 amount = firsttry; 7870 } 7871 } 7872 } 7873 } 7874 } 7875 else 7876 amount = 0; /* no matching '(' or '[' found, use zero indent */ 7877 7878 curwin->w_cursor = realpos; 7879 7880 return amount; 7881 } 7882 #endif /* FEAT_LISP */ 7883 7884 void 7885 prepare_to_exit() 7886 { 7887 #if defined(SIGHUP) && defined(SIG_IGN) 7888 /* Ignore SIGHUP, because a dropped connection causes a read error, which 7889 * makes Vim exit and then handling SIGHUP causes various reentrance 7890 * problems. */ 7891 signal(SIGHUP, SIG_IGN); 7892 #endif 7893 7894 #ifdef FEAT_GUI 7895 if (gui.in_use) 7896 { 7897 gui.dying = TRUE; 7898 out_trash(); /* trash any pending output */ 7899 } 7900 else 7901 #endif 7902 { 7903 windgoto((int)Rows - 1, 0); 7904 7905 /* 7906 * Switch terminal mode back now, so messages end up on the "normal" 7907 * screen (if there are two screens). 7908 */ 7909 settmode(TMODE_COOK); 7910 #ifdef WIN3264 7911 if (can_end_termcap_mode(FALSE) == TRUE) 7912 #endif 7913 stoptermcap(); 7914 out_flush(); 7915 } 7916 } 7917 7918 /* 7919 * Preserve files and exit. 7920 * When called IObuff must contain a message. 7921 */ 7922 void 7923 preserve_exit() 7924 { 7925 buf_T *buf; 7926 7927 prepare_to_exit(); 7928 7929 out_str(IObuff); 7930 screen_start(); /* don't know where cursor is now */ 7931 out_flush(); 7932 7933 ml_close_notmod(); /* close all not-modified buffers */ 7934 7935 for (buf = firstbuf; buf != NULL; buf = buf->b_next) 7936 { 7937 if (buf->b_ml.ml_mfp != NULL && buf->b_ml.ml_mfp->mf_fname != NULL) 7938 { 7939 OUT_STR(_("Vim: preserving files...\n")); 7940 screen_start(); /* don't know where cursor is now */ 7941 out_flush(); 7942 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */ 7943 break; 7944 } 7945 } 7946 7947 ml_close_all(FALSE); /* close all memfiles, without deleting */ 7948 7949 OUT_STR(_("Vim: Finished.\n")); 7950 7951 getout(1); 7952 } 7953 7954 /* 7955 * return TRUE if "fname" exists. 7956 */ 7957 int 7958 vim_fexists(fname) 7959 char_u *fname; 7960 { 7961 struct stat st; 7962 7963 if (mch_stat((char *)fname, &st)) 7964 return FALSE; 7965 return TRUE; 7966 } 7967 7968 /* 7969 * Check for CTRL-C pressed, but only once in a while. 7970 * Should be used instead of ui_breakcheck() for functions that check for 7971 * each line in the file. Calling ui_breakcheck() each time takes too much 7972 * time, because it can be a system call. 7973 */ 7974 7975 #ifndef BREAKCHECK_SKIP 7976 # ifdef FEAT_GUI /* assume the GUI only runs on fast computers */ 7977 # define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 200 7978 # else 7979 # define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 32 7980 # endif 7981 #endif 7982 7983 static int breakcheck_count = 0; 7984 7985 void 7986 line_breakcheck() 7987 { 7988 if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP) 7989 { 7990 breakcheck_count = 0; 7991 ui_breakcheck(); 7992 } 7993 } 7994 7995 /* 7996 * Like line_breakcheck() but check 10 times less often. 7997 */ 7998 void 7999 fast_breakcheck() 8000 { 8001 if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP * 10) 8002 { 8003 breakcheck_count = 0; 8004 ui_breakcheck(); 8005 } 8006 } 8007 8008 /* 8009 * Expand wildcards. Calls gen_expand_wildcards() and removes files matching 8010 * 'wildignore'. 8011 */ 8012 int 8013 expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags) 8014 int num_pat; /* number of input patterns */ 8015 char_u **pat; /* array of input patterns */ 8016 int *num_file; /* resulting number of files */ 8017 char_u ***file; /* array of resulting files */ 8018 int flags; /* EW_DIR, etc. */ 8019 { 8020 int retval; 8021 int i, j; 8022 char_u *p; 8023 int non_suf_match; /* number without matching suffix */ 8024 8025 retval = gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags); 8026 8027 /* When keeping all matches, return here */ 8028 if (flags & EW_KEEPALL) 8029 return retval; 8030 8031 #ifdef FEAT_WILDIGN 8032 /* 8033 * Remove names that match 'wildignore'. 8034 */ 8035 if (*p_wig) 8036 { 8037 char_u *ffname; 8038 8039 /* check all files in (*file)[] */ 8040 for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i) 8041 { 8042 ffname = FullName_save((*file)[i], FALSE); 8043 if (ffname == NULL) /* out of memory */ 8044 break; 8045 # ifdef VMS 8046 vms_remove_version(ffname); 8047 # endif 8048 if (match_file_list(p_wig, (*file)[i], ffname)) 8049 { 8050 /* remove this matching file from the list */ 8051 vim_free((*file)[i]); 8052 for (j = i; j + 1 < *num_file; ++j) 8053 (*file)[j] = (*file)[j + 1]; 8054 --*num_file; 8055 --i; 8056 } 8057 vim_free(ffname); 8058 } 8059 } 8060 #endif 8061 8062 /* 8063 * Move the names where 'suffixes' match to the end. 8064 */ 8065 if (*num_file > 1) 8066 { 8067 non_suf_match = 0; 8068 for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i) 8069 { 8070 if (!match_suffix((*file)[i])) 8071 { 8072 /* 8073 * Move the name without matching suffix to the front 8074 * of the list. 8075 */ 8076 p = (*file)[i]; 8077 for (j = i; j > non_suf_match; --j) 8078 (*file)[j] = (*file)[j - 1]; 8079 (*file)[non_suf_match++] = p; 8080 } 8081 } 8082 } 8083 8084 return retval; 8085 } 8086 8087 /* 8088 * Return TRUE if "fname" matches with an entry in 'suffixes'. 8089 */ 8090 int 8091 match_suffix(fname) 8092 char_u *fname; 8093 { 8094 int fnamelen, setsuflen; 8095 char_u *setsuf; 8096 #define MAXSUFLEN 30 /* maximum length of a file suffix */ 8097 char_u suf_buf[MAXSUFLEN]; 8098 8099 fnamelen = (int)STRLEN(fname); 8100 setsuflen = 0; 8101 for (setsuf = p_su; *setsuf; ) 8102 { 8103 setsuflen = copy_option_part(&setsuf, suf_buf, MAXSUFLEN, ".,"); 8104 if (fnamelen >= setsuflen 8105 && fnamencmp(suf_buf, fname + fnamelen - setsuflen, 8106 (size_t)setsuflen) == 0) 8107 break; 8108 setsuflen = 0; 8109 } 8110 return (setsuflen != 0); 8111 } 8112 8113 #if !defined(NO_EXPANDPATH) || defined(PROTO) 8114 8115 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK 8116 static int vim_backtick __ARGS((char_u *p)); 8117 static int expand_backtick __ARGS((garray_T *gap, char_u *pat, int flags)); 8118 # endif 8119 8120 # if defined(MSDOS) || defined(FEAT_GUI_W16) || defined(WIN3264) 8121 /* 8122 * File name expansion code for MS-DOS, Win16 and Win32. It's here because 8123 * it's shared between these systems. 8124 */ 8125 # if defined(DJGPP) || defined(PROTO) 8126 # define _cdecl /* DJGPP doesn't have this */ 8127 # else 8128 # ifdef __BORLANDC__ 8129 # define _cdecl _RTLENTRYF 8130 # endif 8131 # endif 8132 8133 /* 8134 * comparison function for qsort in dos_expandpath() 8135 */ 8136 static int _cdecl 8137 pstrcmp(const void *a, const void *b) 8138 { 8139 return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1)); 8140 } 8141 8142 # ifndef WIN3264 8143 static void 8144 namelowcpy( 8145 char_u *d, 8146 char_u *s) 8147 { 8148 # ifdef DJGPP 8149 if (USE_LONG_FNAME) /* don't lower case on Windows 95/NT systems */ 8150 while (*s) 8151 *d++ = *s++; 8152 else 8153 # endif 8154 while (*s) 8155 *d++ = TOLOWER_LOC(*s++); 8156 *d = NUL; 8157 } 8158 # endif 8159 8160 /* 8161 * Recursively expand one path component into all matching files and/or 8162 * directories. Adds matches to "gap". Handles "*", "?", "[a-z]", "**", etc. 8163 * Return the number of matches found. 8164 * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting 8165 * at "path[wildoff]". 8166 * Return the number of matches found. 8167 * NOTE: much of this is identical to unix_expandpath(), keep in sync! 8168 */ 8169 static int 8170 dos_expandpath( 8171 garray_T *gap, 8172 char_u *path, 8173 int wildoff, 8174 int flags, /* EW_* flags */ 8175 int didstar) /* expaneded "**" once already */ 8176 { 8177 char_u *buf; 8178 char_u *path_end; 8179 char_u *p, *s, *e; 8180 int start_len = gap->ga_len; 8181 char_u *pat; 8182 regmatch_T regmatch; 8183 int starts_with_dot; 8184 int matches; 8185 int len; 8186 int starstar = FALSE; 8187 static int stardepth = 0; /* depth for "**" expansion */ 8188 #ifdef WIN3264 8189 WIN32_FIND_DATA fb; 8190 HANDLE hFind = (HANDLE)0; 8191 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8192 WIN32_FIND_DATAW wfb; 8193 WCHAR *wn = NULL; /* UCS-2 name, NULL when not used. */ 8194 # endif 8195 #else 8196 struct ffblk fb; 8197 #endif 8198 char_u *matchname; 8199 int ok; 8200 8201 /* Expanding "**" may take a long time, check for CTRL-C. */ 8202 if (stardepth > 0) 8203 { 8204 ui_breakcheck(); 8205 if (got_int) 8206 return 0; 8207 } 8208 8209 /* make room for file name */ 8210 buf = alloc((int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5); 8211 if (buf == NULL) 8212 return 0; 8213 8214 /* 8215 * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard or a ~1. 8216 * Copy it into buf, including the preceding characters. 8217 */ 8218 p = buf; 8219 s = buf; 8220 e = NULL; 8221 path_end = path; 8222 while (*path_end != NUL) 8223 { 8224 /* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will 8225 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */ 8226 if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end)) 8227 *p++ = *path_end++; 8228 else if (*path_end == '\\' || *path_end == ':' || *path_end == '/') 8229 { 8230 if (e != NULL) 8231 break; 8232 s = p + 1; 8233 } 8234 else if (path_end >= path + wildoff 8235 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[~", *path_end) != NULL) 8236 e = p; 8237 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8238 if (has_mbyte) 8239 { 8240 len = (*mb_ptr2len)(path_end); 8241 STRNCPY(p, path_end, len); 8242 p += len; 8243 path_end += len; 8244 } 8245 else 8246 #endif 8247 *p++ = *path_end++; 8248 } 8249 e = p; 8250 *e = NUL; 8251 8252 /* now we have one wildcard component between s and e */ 8253 /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard 8254 * component. */ 8255 for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p) 8256 if (rem_backslash(p)) 8257 { 8258 STRCPY(p, p + 1); 8259 --e; 8260 --s; 8261 } 8262 8263 /* Check for "**" between "s" and "e". */ 8264 for (p = s; p < e; ++p) 8265 if (p[0] == '*' && p[1] == '*') 8266 starstar = TRUE; 8267 8268 starts_with_dot = (*s == '.'); 8269 pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE); 8270 if (pat == NULL) 8271 { 8272 vim_free(buf); 8273 return 0; 8274 } 8275 8276 /* compile the regexp into a program */ 8277 regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE; /* Always ignore case */ 8278 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC); 8279 vim_free(pat); 8280 8281 if (regmatch.regprog == NULL) 8282 { 8283 vim_free(buf); 8284 return 0; 8285 } 8286 8287 /* remember the pattern or file name being looked for */ 8288 matchname = vim_strsave(s); 8289 8290 /* If "**" is by itself, this is the first time we encounter it and more 8291 * is following then find matches without any directory. */ 8292 if (!didstar && stardepth < 100 && starstar && e - s == 2 8293 && *path_end == '/') 8294 { 8295 STRCPY(s, path_end + 1); 8296 ++stardepth; 8297 (void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, (int)(s - buf), flags, TRUE); 8298 --stardepth; 8299 } 8300 8301 /* Scan all files in the directory with "dir/ *.*" */ 8302 STRCPY(s, "*.*"); 8303 #ifdef WIN3264 8304 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8305 if (enc_codepage >= 0 && (int)GetACP() != enc_codepage) 8306 { 8307 /* The active codepage differs from 'encoding'. Attempt using the 8308 * wide function. If it fails because it is not implemented fall back 8309 * to the non-wide version (for Windows 98) */ 8310 wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL); 8311 if (wn != NULL) 8312 { 8313 hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb); 8314 if (hFind == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE 8315 && GetLastError() == ERROR_CALL_NOT_IMPLEMENTED) 8316 { 8317 vim_free(wn); 8318 wn = NULL; 8319 } 8320 } 8321 } 8322 8323 if (wn == NULL) 8324 # endif 8325 hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb); 8326 ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE); 8327 #else 8328 /* If we are expanding wildcards we try both files and directories */ 8329 ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb, 8330 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0); 8331 #endif 8332 8333 while (ok) 8334 { 8335 #ifdef WIN3264 8336 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8337 if (wn != NULL) 8338 p = ucs2_to_enc(wfb.cFileName, NULL); /* p is allocated here */ 8339 else 8340 # endif 8341 p = (char_u *)fb.cFileName; 8342 #else 8343 p = (char_u *)fb.ff_name; 8344 #endif 8345 /* Ignore entries starting with a dot, unless when asked for. Accept 8346 * all entries found with "matchname". */ 8347 if ((p[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot) 8348 && (matchname == NULL 8349 || vim_regexec(®match, p, (colnr_T)0))) 8350 { 8351 #ifdef WIN3264 8352 STRCPY(s, p); 8353 #else 8354 namelowcpy(s, p); 8355 #endif 8356 len = (int)STRLEN(buf); 8357 8358 if (starstar && stardepth < 100) 8359 { 8360 /* For "**" in the pattern first go deeper in the tree to 8361 * find matches. */ 8362 STRCPY(buf + len, "/**"); 8363 STRCPY(buf + len + 3, path_end); 8364 ++stardepth; 8365 (void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, TRUE); 8366 --stardepth; 8367 } 8368 8369 STRCPY(buf + len, path_end); 8370 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end)) 8371 { 8372 /* need to expand another component of the path */ 8373 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */ 8374 (void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, FALSE); 8375 } 8376 else 8377 { 8378 /* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */ 8379 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */ 8380 if (*path_end != 0) 8381 backslash_halve(buf + len + 1); 8382 if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0) /* add existing file */ 8383 addfile(gap, buf, flags); 8384 } 8385 } 8386 8387 #ifdef WIN3264 8388 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8389 if (wn != NULL) 8390 { 8391 vim_free(p); 8392 ok = FindNextFileW(hFind, &wfb); 8393 } 8394 else 8395 # endif 8396 ok = FindNextFile(hFind, &fb); 8397 #else 8398 ok = (findnext(&fb) == 0); 8399 #endif 8400 8401 /* If no more matches and no match was used, try expanding the name 8402 * itself. Finds the long name of a short filename. */ 8403 if (!ok && matchname != NULL && gap->ga_len == start_len) 8404 { 8405 STRCPY(s, matchname); 8406 #ifdef WIN3264 8407 FindClose(hFind); 8408 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8409 if (wn != NULL) 8410 { 8411 vim_free(wn); 8412 wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL); 8413 if (wn != NULL) 8414 hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb); 8415 } 8416 if (wn == NULL) 8417 # endif 8418 hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb); 8419 ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE); 8420 #else 8421 ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb, 8422 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0); 8423 #endif 8424 vim_free(matchname); 8425 matchname = NULL; 8426 } 8427 } 8428 8429 #ifdef WIN3264 8430 FindClose(hFind); 8431 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8432 vim_free(wn); 8433 # endif 8434 #endif 8435 vim_free(buf); 8436 vim_free(regmatch.regprog); 8437 vim_free(matchname); 8438 8439 matches = gap->ga_len - start_len; 8440 if (matches > 0) 8441 qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, (size_t)matches, 8442 sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp); 8443 return matches; 8444 } 8445 8446 int 8447 mch_expandpath( 8448 garray_T *gap, 8449 char_u *path, 8450 int flags) /* EW_* flags */ 8451 { 8452 return dos_expandpath(gap, path, 0, flags, FALSE); 8453 } 8454 # endif /* MSDOS || FEAT_GUI_W16 || WIN3264 */ 8455 8456 #if (defined(UNIX) && !defined(VMS)) || defined(USE_UNIXFILENAME) \ 8457 || defined(PROTO) 8458 /* 8459 * Unix style wildcard expansion code. 8460 * It's here because it's used both for Unix and Mac. 8461 */ 8462 static int pstrcmp __ARGS((const void *, const void *)); 8463 8464 static int 8465 pstrcmp(a, b) 8466 const void *a, *b; 8467 { 8468 return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1)); 8469 } 8470 8471 /* 8472 * Recursively expand one path component into all matching files and/or 8473 * directories. Adds matches to "gap". Handles "*", "?", "[a-z]", "**", etc. 8474 * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting 8475 * at "path + wildoff". 8476 * Return the number of matches found. 8477 * NOTE: much of this is identical to dos_expandpath(), keep in sync! 8478 */ 8479 int 8480 unix_expandpath(gap, path, wildoff, flags, didstar) 8481 garray_T *gap; 8482 char_u *path; 8483 int wildoff; 8484 int flags; /* EW_* flags */ 8485 int didstar; /* expanded "**" once already */ 8486 { 8487 char_u *buf; 8488 char_u *path_end; 8489 char_u *p, *s, *e; 8490 int start_len = gap->ga_len; 8491 char_u *pat; 8492 regmatch_T regmatch; 8493 int starts_with_dot; 8494 int matches; 8495 int len; 8496 int starstar = FALSE; 8497 static int stardepth = 0; /* depth for "**" expansion */ 8498 8499 DIR *dirp; 8500 struct dirent *dp; 8501 8502 /* Expanding "**" may take a long time, check for CTRL-C. */ 8503 if (stardepth > 0) 8504 { 8505 ui_breakcheck(); 8506 if (got_int) 8507 return 0; 8508 } 8509 8510 /* make room for file name */ 8511 buf = alloc((int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5); 8512 if (buf == NULL) 8513 return 0; 8514 8515 /* 8516 * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard. 8517 * Copy it into "buf", including the preceding characters. 8518 */ 8519 p = buf; 8520 s = buf; 8521 e = NULL; 8522 path_end = path; 8523 while (*path_end != NUL) 8524 { 8525 /* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will 8526 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */ 8527 if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end)) 8528 *p++ = *path_end++; 8529 else if (*path_end == '/') 8530 { 8531 if (e != NULL) 8532 break; 8533 s = p + 1; 8534 } 8535 else if (path_end >= path + wildoff 8536 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[{~$", *path_end) != NULL) 8537 e = p; 8538 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8539 if (has_mbyte) 8540 { 8541 len = (*mb_ptr2len)(path_end); 8542 STRNCPY(p, path_end, len); 8543 p += len; 8544 path_end += len; 8545 } 8546 else 8547 #endif 8548 *p++ = *path_end++; 8549 } 8550 e = p; 8551 *e = NUL; 8552 8553 /* now we have one wildcard component between "s" and "e" */ 8554 /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard 8555 * component. */ 8556 for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p) 8557 if (rem_backslash(p)) 8558 { 8559 STRCPY(p, p + 1); 8560 --e; 8561 --s; 8562 } 8563 8564 /* Check for "**" between "s" and "e". */ 8565 for (p = s; p < e; ++p) 8566 if (p[0] == '*' && p[1] == '*') 8567 starstar = TRUE; 8568 8569 /* convert the file pattern to a regexp pattern */ 8570 starts_with_dot = (*s == '.'); 8571 pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE); 8572 if (pat == NULL) 8573 { 8574 vim_free(buf); 8575 return 0; 8576 } 8577 8578 /* compile the regexp into a program */ 8579 #ifdef MACOS_X /* Can/Should we use CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME instead ?*/ 8580 regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE; /* Behave like Terminal.app */ 8581 #else 8582 regmatch.rm_ic = FALSE; /* Don't ever ignore case */ 8583 #endif 8584 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC); 8585 vim_free(pat); 8586 8587 if (regmatch.regprog == NULL) 8588 { 8589 vim_free(buf); 8590 return 0; 8591 } 8592 8593 /* If "**" is by itself, this is the first time we encounter it and more 8594 * is following then find matches without any directory. */ 8595 if (!didstar && stardepth < 100 && starstar && e - s == 2 8596 && *path_end == '/') 8597 { 8598 STRCPY(s, path_end + 1); 8599 ++stardepth; 8600 (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, (int)(s - buf), flags, TRUE); 8601 --stardepth; 8602 } 8603 8604 /* open the directory for scanning */ 8605 *s = NUL; 8606 dirp = opendir(*buf == NUL ? "." : (char *)buf); 8607 8608 /* Find all matching entries */ 8609 if (dirp != NULL) 8610 { 8611 for (;;) 8612 { 8613 dp = readdir(dirp); 8614 if (dp == NULL) 8615 break; 8616 if ((dp->d_name[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot) 8617 && vim_regexec(®match, (char_u *)dp->d_name, (colnr_T)0)) 8618 { 8619 STRCPY(s, dp->d_name); 8620 len = STRLEN(buf); 8621 8622 if (starstar && stardepth < 100) 8623 { 8624 /* For "**" in the pattern first go deeper in the tree to 8625 * find matches. */ 8626 STRCPY(buf + len, "/**"); 8627 STRCPY(buf + len + 3, path_end); 8628 ++stardepth; 8629 (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, TRUE); 8630 --stardepth; 8631 } 8632 8633 STRCPY(buf + len, path_end); 8634 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end)) /* handle more wildcards */ 8635 { 8636 /* need to expand another component of the path */ 8637 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */ 8638 (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, FALSE); 8639 } 8640 else 8641 { 8642 /* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */ 8643 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */ 8644 if (*path_end != NUL) 8645 backslash_halve(buf + len + 1); 8646 if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0) /* add existing file */ 8647 { 8648 #if defined(MACOS_X) && defined(FEAT_MBYTE) 8649 size_t precomp_len = STRLEN(buf)+1; 8650 char_u *precomp_buf = 8651 mac_precompose_path(buf, precomp_len, &precomp_len); 8652 if (precomp_buf) 8653 { 8654 mch_memmove(buf, precomp_buf, precomp_len); 8655 vim_free(precomp_buf); 8656 } 8657 #endif 8658 addfile(gap, buf, flags); 8659 } 8660 } 8661 } 8662 } 8663 8664 closedir(dirp); 8665 } 8666 8667 vim_free(buf); 8668 vim_free(regmatch.regprog); 8669 8670 matches = gap->ga_len - start_len; 8671 if (matches > 0) 8672 qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, matches, 8673 sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp); 8674 return matches; 8675 } 8676 #endif 8677 8678 /* 8679 * Generic wildcard expansion code. 8680 * 8681 * Characters in "pat" that should not be expanded must be preceded with a 8682 * backslash. E.g., "/path\ with\ spaces/my\*star*" 8683 * 8684 * Return FAIL when no single file was found. In this case "num_file" is not 8685 * set, and "file" may contain an error message. 8686 * Return OK when some files found. "num_file" is set to the number of 8687 * matches, "file" to the array of matches. Call FreeWild() later. 8688 */ 8689 int 8690 gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags) 8691 int num_pat; /* number of input patterns */ 8692 char_u **pat; /* array of input patterns */ 8693 int *num_file; /* resulting number of files */ 8694 char_u ***file; /* array of resulting files */ 8695 int flags; /* EW_* flags */ 8696 { 8697 int i; 8698 garray_T ga; 8699 char_u *p; 8700 static int recursive = FALSE; 8701 int add_pat; 8702 8703 /* 8704 * expand_env() is called to expand things like "~user". If this fails, 8705 * it calls ExpandOne(), which brings us back here. In this case, always 8706 * call the machine specific expansion function, if possible. Otherwise, 8707 * return FAIL. 8708 */ 8709 if (recursive) 8710 #ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR 8711 return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags); 8712 #else 8713 return FAIL; 8714 #endif 8715 8716 #ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR 8717 /* 8718 * If there are any special wildcard characters which we cannot handle 8719 * here, call machine specific function for all the expansion. This 8720 * avoids starting the shell for each argument separately. 8721 * For `=expr` do use the internal function. 8722 */ 8723 for (i = 0; i < num_pat; i++) 8724 { 8725 if (vim_strpbrk(pat[i], (char_u *)SPECIAL_WILDCHAR) != NULL 8726 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK 8727 && !(vim_backtick(pat[i]) && pat[i][1] == '=') 8728 # endif 8729 ) 8730 return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags); 8731 } 8732 #endif 8733 8734 recursive = TRUE; 8735 8736 /* 8737 * The matching file names are stored in a growarray. Init it empty. 8738 */ 8739 ga_init2(&ga, (int)sizeof(char_u *), 30); 8740 8741 for (i = 0; i < num_pat; ++i) 8742 { 8743 add_pat = -1; 8744 p = pat[i]; 8745 8746 #ifdef VIM_BACKTICK 8747 if (vim_backtick(p)) 8748 add_pat = expand_backtick(&ga, p, flags); 8749 else 8750 #endif 8751 { 8752 /* 8753 * First expand environment variables, "~/" and "~user/". 8754 */ 8755 if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL) 8756 { 8757 p = expand_env_save(p); 8758 if (p == NULL) 8759 p = pat[i]; 8760 #ifdef UNIX 8761 /* 8762 * On Unix, if expand_env() can't expand an environment 8763 * variable, use the shell to do that. Discard previously 8764 * found file names and start all over again. 8765 */ 8766 else if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL) 8767 { 8768 vim_free(p); 8769 ga_clear(&ga); 8770 i = mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, 8771 flags); 8772 recursive = FALSE; 8773 return i; 8774 } 8775 #endif 8776 } 8777 8778 /* 8779 * If there are wildcards: Expand file names and add each match to 8780 * the list. If there is no match, and EW_NOTFOUND is given, add 8781 * the pattern. 8782 * If there are no wildcards: Add the file name if it exists or 8783 * when EW_NOTFOUND is given. 8784 */ 8785 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(p)) 8786 add_pat = mch_expandpath(&ga, p, flags); 8787 } 8788 8789 if (add_pat == -1 || (add_pat == 0 && (flags & EW_NOTFOUND))) 8790 { 8791 char_u *t = backslash_halve_save(p); 8792 8793 #if defined(MACOS_CLASSIC) 8794 slash_to_colon(t); 8795 #endif 8796 /* When EW_NOTFOUND is used, always add files and dirs. Makes 8797 * "vim c:/" work. */ 8798 if (flags & EW_NOTFOUND) 8799 addfile(&ga, t, flags | EW_DIR | EW_FILE); 8800 else if (mch_getperm(t) >= 0) 8801 addfile(&ga, t, flags); 8802 vim_free(t); 8803 } 8804 8805 if (p != pat[i]) 8806 vim_free(p); 8807 } 8808 8809 *num_file = ga.ga_len; 8810 *file = (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? (char_u **)ga.ga_data : (char_u **)""; 8811 8812 recursive = FALSE; 8813 8814 return (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? OK : FAIL; 8815 } 8816 8817 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK 8818 8819 /* 8820 * Return TRUE if we can expand this backtick thing here. 8821 */ 8822 static int 8823 vim_backtick(p) 8824 char_u *p; 8825 { 8826 return (*p == '`' && *(p + 1) != NUL && *(p + STRLEN(p) - 1) == '`'); 8827 } 8828 8829 /* 8830 * Expand an item in `backticks` by executing it as a command. 8831 * Currently only works when pat[] starts and ends with a `. 8832 * Returns number of file names found. 8833 */ 8834 static int 8835 expand_backtick(gap, pat, flags) 8836 garray_T *gap; 8837 char_u *pat; 8838 int flags; /* EW_* flags */ 8839 { 8840 char_u *p; 8841 char_u *cmd; 8842 char_u *buffer; 8843 int cnt = 0; 8844 int i; 8845 8846 /* Create the command: lop off the backticks. */ 8847 cmd = vim_strnsave(pat + 1, (int)STRLEN(pat) - 2); 8848 if (cmd == NULL) 8849 return 0; 8850 8851 #ifdef FEAT_EVAL 8852 if (*cmd == '=') /* `={expr}`: Expand expression */ 8853 buffer = eval_to_string(cmd + 1, &p); 8854 else 8855 #endif 8856 buffer = get_cmd_output(cmd, NULL, 8857 (flags & EW_SILENT) ? SHELL_SILENT : 0); 8858 vim_free(cmd); 8859 if (buffer == NULL) 8860 return 0; 8861 8862 cmd = buffer; 8863 while (*cmd != NUL) 8864 { 8865 cmd = skipwhite(cmd); /* skip over white space */ 8866 p = cmd; 8867 while (*p != NUL && *p != '\r' && *p != '\n') /* skip over entry */ 8868 ++p; 8869 /* add an entry if it is not empty */ 8870 if (p > cmd) 8871 { 8872 i = *p; 8873 *p = NUL; 8874 addfile(gap, cmd, flags); 8875 *p = i; 8876 ++cnt; 8877 } 8878 cmd = p; 8879 while (*cmd != NUL && (*cmd == '\r' || *cmd == '\n')) 8880 ++cmd; 8881 } 8882 8883 vim_free(buffer); 8884 return cnt; 8885 } 8886 # endif /* VIM_BACKTICK */ 8887 8888 /* 8889 * Add a file to a file list. Accepted flags: 8890 * EW_DIR add directories 8891 * EW_FILE add files 8892 * EW_NOTFOUND add even when it doesn't exist 8893 * EW_ADDSLASH add slash after directory name 8894 */ 8895 void 8896 addfile(gap, f, flags) 8897 garray_T *gap; 8898 char_u *f; /* filename */ 8899 int flags; 8900 { 8901 char_u *p; 8902 int isdir; 8903 8904 /* if the file/dir doesn't exist, may not add it */ 8905 if (!(flags & EW_NOTFOUND) && mch_getperm(f) < 0) 8906 return; 8907 8908 #ifdef FNAME_ILLEGAL 8909 /* if the file/dir contains illegal characters, don't add it */ 8910 if (vim_strpbrk(f, (char_u *)FNAME_ILLEGAL) != NULL) 8911 return; 8912 #endif 8913 8914 isdir = mch_isdir(f); 8915 if ((isdir && !(flags & EW_DIR)) || (!isdir && !(flags & EW_FILE))) 8916 return; 8917 8918 /* Make room for another item in the file list. */ 8919 if (ga_grow(gap, 1) == FAIL) 8920 return; 8921 8922 p = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(f) + 1 + isdir)); 8923 if (p == NULL) 8924 return; 8925 8926 STRCPY(p, f); 8927 #ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME 8928 slash_adjust(p); 8929 #endif 8930 /* 8931 * Append a slash or backslash after directory names if none is present. 8932 */ 8933 #ifndef DONT_ADD_PATHSEP_TO_DIR 8934 if (isdir && (flags & EW_ADDSLASH)) 8935 add_pathsep(p); 8936 #endif 8937 ((char_u **)gap->ga_data)[gap->ga_len++] = p; 8938 } 8939 #endif /* !NO_EXPANDPATH */ 8940 8941 #if defined(VIM_BACKTICK) || defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO) 8942 8943 #ifndef SEEK_SET 8944 # define SEEK_SET 0 8945 #endif 8946 #ifndef SEEK_END 8947 # define SEEK_END 2 8948 #endif 8949 8950 /* 8951 * Get the stdout of an external command. 8952 * Returns an allocated string, or NULL for error. 8953 */ 8954 char_u * 8955 get_cmd_output(cmd, infile, flags) 8956 char_u *cmd; 8957 char_u *infile; /* optional input file name */ 8958 int flags; /* can be SHELL_SILENT */ 8959 { 8960 char_u *tempname; 8961 char_u *command; 8962 char_u *buffer = NULL; 8963 int len; 8964 int i = 0; 8965 FILE *fd; 8966 8967 if (check_restricted() || check_secure()) 8968 return NULL; 8969 8970 /* get a name for the temp file */ 8971 if ((tempname = vim_tempname('o')) == NULL) 8972 { 8973 EMSG(_(e_notmp)); 8974 return NULL; 8975 } 8976 8977 /* Add the redirection stuff */ 8978 command = make_filter_cmd(cmd, infile, tempname); 8979 if (command == NULL) 8980 goto done; 8981 8982 /* 8983 * Call the shell to execute the command (errors are ignored). 8984 * Don't check timestamps here. 8985 */ 8986 ++no_check_timestamps; 8987 call_shell(command, SHELL_DOOUT | SHELL_EXPAND | flags); 8988 --no_check_timestamps; 8989 8990 vim_free(command); 8991 8992 /* 8993 * read the names from the file into memory 8994 */ 8995 # ifdef VMS 8996 /* created temporary file is not allways readable as binary */ 8997 fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, "r"); 8998 # else 8999 fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, READBIN); 9000 # endif 9001 9002 if (fd == NULL) 9003 { 9004 EMSG2(_(e_notopen), tempname); 9005 goto done; 9006 } 9007 9008 fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_END); 9009 len = ftell(fd); /* get size of temp file */ 9010 fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_SET); 9011 9012 buffer = alloc(len + 1); 9013 if (buffer != NULL) 9014 i = (int)fread((char *)buffer, (size_t)1, (size_t)len, fd); 9015 fclose(fd); 9016 mch_remove(tempname); 9017 if (buffer == NULL) 9018 goto done; 9019 #ifdef VMS 9020 len = i; /* VMS doesn't give us what we asked for... */ 9021 #endif 9022 if (i != len) 9023 { 9024 EMSG2(_(e_notread), tempname); 9025 vim_free(buffer); 9026 buffer = NULL; 9027 } 9028 else 9029 buffer[len] = '\0'; /* make sure the buffer is terminated */ 9030 9031 done: 9032 vim_free(tempname); 9033 return buffer; 9034 } 9035 #endif 9036 9037 /* 9038 * Free the list of files returned by expand_wildcards() or other expansion 9039 * functions. 9040 */ 9041 void 9042 FreeWild(count, files) 9043 int count; 9044 char_u **files; 9045 { 9046 if (files == NULL || count <= 0) 9047 return; 9048 #if defined(__EMX__) && defined(__ALWAYS_HAS_TRAILING_NULL_POINTER) /* XXX */ 9049 /* 9050 * Is this still OK for when other functions than expand_wildcards() have 9051 * been used??? 9052 */ 9053 _fnexplodefree((char **)files); 9054 #else 9055 while (count--) 9056 vim_free(files[count]); 9057 vim_free(files); 9058 #endif 9059 } 9060 9061 /* 9062 * return TRUE when need to go to Insert mode because of 'insertmode'. 9063 * Don't do this when still processing a command or a mapping. 9064 * Don't do this when inside a ":normal" command. 9065 */ 9066 int 9067 goto_im() 9068 { 9069 return (p_im && stuff_empty() && typebuf_typed()); 9070 } 9071